Standard Requirements for Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Existing Concrete Buildings (369.1

369.
1
Public Discussion
Draft
1
2 Standard Requirements for Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Existing Concrete Buildings
3 (369.1) and Commentary
4 Reported by Committee 369
Wassim Ghannoum, Chair
Anna Birely Adolfo Matamoros
Sergio Brena Steven McCabe
Casey Champion Murat Melek
Jeffrey Dragovich Jack Moehle
Kenneth Elwood Arif Ozkan
Una Gilmartin Robert Pekelnicky
Garrett Hagen Jose Pincheira
Arne Halterman
Wael Hassan Mario Rodriguez
Mohammad Iqbal Murat Saatcioglu
Jose Izquierdo-Encarnacion Siamak Sattar
Afshar Jalalian Halil Sezen
Thomas Kang Roberto Stark
Dominic Kelly Andreas Stavridis
Insung Kim John Wallace
Laura Lowes Tom Xia
Kenneth Luttrell
This draft is not final and is subject to revision. This draft is for public review and comment only.
Page 1 of 217
1
2 Keywords: ASCE 41; acceptance criteria; anchorage; axial failure; bond-strength; concrete;
3 connection; deformation-controlled; demand-capacity ratio; force-controlled; foundation;
4 dynamic analysis; earthquake; effective flexural strength; stiffness; effective width; linear static
5 analysis; load-deformation relationship; m-factor; modeling parameters; moment-frames;
6 nonlinear analysis; plastic hinge; plastic rotation; probability of failure; posttensioned; prestress;
7 shear strength; slab-column moment frames; seismic rehabilitation; retrofit; retrofit measure;
8 stiffness; structural wall.
9 PREFACE
10 In this standard, reference to ASCE 41 implies reference to the ASCE/SEI 41-17 standard. In this
11 standard, reference to ACI 318 implies reference to the ACI 318-14 Building Code.
12 This standard provides retrofit and rehabilitation criteria for reinforced concrete buildings based
13 on results from the most recent research on the seismic performance of existing concrete
14 buildings. The intent of the ACI 369.1 standard is to provide a continuously updated resource
15 document for modifications to Chapter 10 of ASCE 41, similar to how the National Earthquake
16 Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended Seismic Provisions produced by the
17 Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) (FEMA 450) have served as source
18 documents for the International Building Code (IBC) and its predecessor building codes.
19 Specifically, this version of ACI 369.1 serves as the basis for Chapter 10, Concrete of ASCE
20 41.
21 This standard should be used in conjunction with Chapters 1 through 7 of ASCE/SEI 41-
22 17. Chapter 1 of ASCE 41 provides general requirements for evaluation and retrofit, including
23 the selection of performance objectives and retrofit strategies. Chapter 2 of ASCE 41 defines
Page 2 of 217
1 performance objectives and seismic hazards. Chapter 3 of ASCE 41 provides the requirements
2 for evaluation and retrofit, including treating as-built information and selecting the appropriate
3 screening procedures. Chapter 4 of ASCE 41 summarizes Tier 1 screening procedures, while
4 Chapters 5 and 6 summarize Tier 2 deficiency-based procedures and Tier 3 systematic
5 procedures for evaluation and retrofit, respectively. Chapter 7 of ASCE 41 details analysis
6 procedures referenced in ACI 369.1, including, linear and nonlinear analysis procedures,
7 acceptance criteria, and alternative methods for determining modeling parameters and
8 acceptance criteria. Chapter 8 of ASCE 41 provides geotechnical engineering provisions for
9 building foundations and assessment of seismic-geologic site hazards. References to these
10 chapters can be found throughout the standard. The design professional is referred to the FEMA
11 report, FEMA 547, for detailed information on seismic rehabilitation measures for concrete
12 buildings. Repair techniques for earthquake-damaged concrete components are not included in
13 ACI 369.1. The design professional is referred to FEMA 306, FEMA 307, and FEMA 308 for
14 information on evaluation and repair of damaged concrete wall components.
15 This standard does not provide modeling procedures, acceptance criteria, and rehabilitation
16 measures for concrete-encased steel composite components. Future versions will provide
17 provision updates for concrete moment frames and will add provisions for concrete components
18 and systems omitted in the present version of the standard.
19
20
21 INTRODUCTION
22
Page 3 of 217
1 Earthquake reconnaissance has clearly demonstrated that existing concrete buildings designed
2 before the introduction of seismic design codes in the 1980s are more vulnerable to severe
3 damage or collapse when subjected to strong ground motion than concrete buildings built after
4 that period. Seismic rehabilitation of existing buildings where new components are added or
5 existing components are modified or retrofitted with new materials, or both, can be used to
6 mitigate the risk to damage in future earthquakes. Seismic rehabilitation is encouraged not only
7 to reduce the risk of damage and injury in future earthquakes, but also to extend the life of
8 existing buildings and reduce using new materials in the promotion of sustainability objectives.
9 It is not possible to codify all problems encountered in the process of performing the seismic
10 evaluation and retrofit of reinforced concrete buildings, nor is the intent of the standard to do so.
11 The standard provides a basic framework for modeling and evaluation of structures that reflects
12 the latest information available from researchers and practicing engineers, so that seismic
13 evaluation and retrofit can be performed with a consistent set of criteria. Many provisions in the
14 standard rely on the use of sound engineering judgement for their implementation. The
15 commentary of the standard provides references that describe in detail the implementation of
16 methodologies adopted in the standard.
17
18 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL
19 1.1ScopeThis standard sets forth requirements for the seismic evaluation and retrofit of concrete
20 components of the seismic-force-resisting system of an existing building. These building standard
21 requirements apply to existing concrete components, retrofitted concrete components, and new
22 concrete components. Provisions of this standard do not apply to concrete-encased steel composite
23 components.
Page 4 of 217
1 Chapter 2 specifies data collection procedures for obtaining material properties and performing
2 condition assessments. Chapter 3 provides general analysis and design requirements for concrete
3 components. Chapters 4 through 9 provide modeling procedures, component strengths, acceptance
4 criteria, and retrofit measures for cast-in-place and precast concrete moment frames, concrete
5 frames with masonry infills, cast-in-place and precast concrete shear walls, and concrete braced
6 frames. Chapters 10 through 12 provide modeling procedures, strengths, acceptance criteria, and
7 retrofit measures for concrete diaphragms and concrete foundation systems.
8 C1.1Scope
9 These standard requirements were developed based on the best knowledge of the seismic
10 performanceofexistingconcretebuildingsatthetimeofpublication.Theserequirementsarenot
11 intendedtorestrictthelicenseddesignprofessionalfromusingnewinformationthatbecomes
12 available before the issuance of the next edition of this standard. Such new information can
13 includetestsconductedtoaddressspecificbuildingconditions.
14 Thisstandardprovidesshortdescriptionsofpotentialseismicretrofitmeasuresforeachconcrete
15 buildingsystem.Thelicenseddesignprofessional,however,isreferredtoFEMA547fordetailed
16 informationonseismicretrofitmeasuresforconcretebuildings.Repairtechniquesforearthquake
17 damagedconcretecomponentsarenotincludedinthisstandard.Thelicenseddesignprofessional
18 isreferredtoFEMA306,FEMA307,andFEMA308forinformationonevaluationandrepairof
19 damagedconcretewallcomponents.
20 Concreteencasedsteelcompositecomponentsbehavedifferentlyfromconcretesectionsreinforced
21 withreinforcingsteel.Concreteencasedsteelcompositecomponentsfrequentlybehaveasover
22 reinforcedsections.Thistypeofcomponentbehaviorwasnotrepresentedinthedatasetsused
Page 5 of 217
1 to develop the forcedeformation modeling relationships and acceptance criteria in this
2 standardandisnotcoveredinthisstandard.Concreteencasementisoftenprovidedforfire
3 protectionratherthanforstrengthorstiffnessandtypicallylackstransversereinforcement.In
4 somecases,thetransversereinforcementdoesnotmeetdetailingrequirementsinAISC360.
5 Lackofadequateconfinementcanresultinlateralexpansionofthecoreconcrete,whichexacerbates
6 bondslipand,underminesthefundamentalprinciplethatplanesectionsremainplane.
7 Testingandanalysisusedtodetermineacceptancecriteriaforconcreteencasedsteelcomposite
8 componentsshouldincludetheeffectofbondslipbetweensteelandconcrete,confinementratio,
9 confinementreinforcementdetailing,kinematics,andappropriatestrainlimits.
10 Topreservehistoricbuildings,exercisecareinselectingtheappropriateretrofitapproachesand
11 techniquesforapplication.
12
13
14 CHAPTER 2MATERIAL PROPERTIES AND CONDITION ASSESSMENT
15 2.1General
16 Mechanical properties of materials shall be obtained from available drawings, specifications, and
17 other documents for the existing building in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 41 Section
18 3.2. Where these documents fail to provide adequate information to quantify material properties,
19 such information shall be supplemented by materials testing based on requirements of Chapter 2.
20 The condition of the concrete components of the structure shall be determined using the
21 requirements of Section 2.3.
22 Material properties of existing concrete components shall be determined in accordance with
23 Section 2.2. The use of default material properties based on historical information is permitted
Page 6 of 217
1 in accordance with Section 2.2.5. A condition assessment shall be conducted in accordance with
2 Section 2.3. The extent of materials testing and condition assessment performed shall be used to
3 determine the knowledge factor as specified in Section 2.4.
5 C2.1General
6 Chapter2identifiespropertiesrequiringconsiderationandprovidesrequirementsfordetermining
7 buildingproperties.Alsodescribedistheneedforathoroughconditionassessmentandutilizationof
8 knowledge gainedinanalyzing componentand systembehavior.Personnelinvolvedin material
9 property quantification and condition assessment should be experienced in the proper
10 implementationoftestingpracticesandtheinterpretationofresults.
11 Whenmodelingaconcretebuilding,itisimportanttoinvestigatelocalpracticesrelativetoseismic
12 design. Specific benchmark years can be determined for the implementation of earthquake
13 resistant design in most locations, but caution should be exercised in assuming optimistic
14 characteristicsforanyspecificbuilding.Particularlywithconcretematerials,the dateoforiginal
15 buildingconstructionsignificantlyinfluencesseismicperformance.Withoutdeleteriousconditions
16 ormaterials,concretegainscompressivestrengthfromthetimeitisoriginallycastandinplace.
17 Strengths typically exceed specified design values (28day or similar). In older construction,
18 concrete strength was often very low (less than 3000 psi) and it was rarely specified in the
19 drawings..Earlyadoptionsofconcreteinbuildingsoftenusedreinforcingsteelwithrelativelylow
20 strength and ductility, limited continuity, and reduced bond development. Continuity between
21 specificexistingcomponentsandelements,suchasbeams,columns,diaphragms,andshearwalls,
22 canbeparticularlydifficulttoassessbecauseofconcretecoverandotherbarrierstoinspection.
Page 7 of 217
1 Propertiesofweldedwirereinforcementforvariousperiods of construction can be obtained
2 fromtheWireReinforcementInstitute(WRI2009).
3 Documentation of the material properties and grades used in component and connection
4 constructionisinvaluableandcanbeeffectivelyusedtoreducetheamountofinplacetesting
5 required. The licensed design professional is encouraged to research and acquire all available
6 recordsfromoriginalconstruction,includingphotographs,toconfirmreinforcementdetailsshown
7 ontheplans.
8 Furtherguidanceontheconditionassessmentofexistingconcretebuildingscanbefoundinthe
9 following:
10 ACI201.1R,whichprovidesguidanceonconductingaconditionsurveyofexistingconcrete
11 structures;
12 ACI364.1R,whichdescribesthegeneralproceduresusedfortheevaluationofconcrete
13 structuresbeforeretrofit;and
14 ACI437R,whichdescribesmethodsforstrengthevaluationofexistingconcretebuildings,
15 includinganalyticalandloadtestmethods.
16
17 2.2 Properties of In-Place Materials and Components
18 2.2.1 Material Properties
19 2.2.1.1 GeneralThe following component and connection material properties shall be obtained
20 for the as-built structure:
21 1. Concrete compressive strength; and
Page 8 of 217
1 2. Yield and ultimate strength of conventional and prestressing reinforcing steel, cast-in -
2 place and post-installed anchors, and metal connection hardware.
3 Where materials testing is required by ASCE 41 Section 6.2, the test methods to quantify material
4 properties shall comply with the requirements of Section 2.2.3. The frequency of sampling,
5 including the minimum number of tests for property determination, shall comply with the
6 requirements of Section 2.2.4.
8 C2.2.1.1GeneralOthermaterialpropertiesandconditionsofinterestforconcretecomponents
9 include
10 1. Tensilestrengthandmodulusofelasticityofconcrete;
11 2. Ductility,toughness,andfatiguepropertiesofconcrete;
12 3. Carbonequivalentpresentinthereinforcingsteel;and
13 4. Presenceofanydegradationsuchascorrosionordeteriorationofbondbetweenconcreteand
14 reinforcement.
15 Theextentofeffortmadetodeterminethesepropertiesdependsonavailabilityofaccurate,updated
16 construction documents and drawings; construction quality and type; accessibility; and material
17 conditions. The analysis method selectedfor example, linear static procedure (LSP) or nonlinear
18 static procedure (NSP)might also influence the testing scope. Concrete tensile strength and
19 modulusofelasticitycanbeestimatedbasedonthecompressivestrengthandmaynotwarrantthe
20 damageassociatedwithanyextracoringrequired.
21 ThesamplesizeandremovalpracticesfollowedarereferencedinFEMA274,SectionsC6.3.2.3
22 and C6.3.2.4. ACI 228.1R provides guidance on methods to estimate the inplace strength of
Page 9 of 217
1 concrete in existing structures, whereas ACI 214.4R provides guidance on coring in existing
2 structures and interpretation of core compressive strengthtest results. Generally, mechanical
3 propertiesforbothconcreteandreinforcingsteelcanbeestablishedfromcombinedcoreand
4 specimensamplingatsimilarlocations,followedbylaboratorytesting.Coredrillingshouldminimize
5 damagetotheexistingreinforcingsteel.
7 2.2.1.2 Nominal or Specified PropertiesNominal material properties, or properties specified in
8 construction documents, shall be taken as lower-bound material properties. Corresponding
9 expected material properties shall be calculated by multiplying lower-bound values by a factor
10 taken from Table 1 to translate from lower-bound to expected values. Alternative factors shall be
11 permitted where justified by test data.
12
13 2.2.2 Component PropertiesThe following component properties and as-built conditions shall
14 be established:
15 1. Cross-sectional dimensions of individual components and overall configuration of
16 the structure;
17 2. Configuration of component connections, size, embedment depth, and type of
18 anchors, thickness of connector material, anchorage and interconnection of
19 embedments and the presence of bracing or stiffening components;
20 3. Modifications to components or overall configuration of the structure;
21 4. Most recent physical condition of components and connections, and the extent of
22 any deterioration;
Page 10 of 217
1 5. Deformations beyond those expected because of gravity loads, such as those caused
2 by settlement or past earthquake events; and
3 6. Presence of other conditions that influence building performance, such as
4 nonstructural components that can interact with structural components during
5 earthquake excitation.
6 C2.2.2ComponentPropertiesComponentpropertiesarerequiredtoproperlycharacterize
7 buildingperformanceinseismicanalysis.Thestartingpointforassessingcomponentproperties
8 andconditionisretrievalofavailableconstructiondocuments.Apreliminaryreviewshould
9 identifyprimarygravityandseismicforceresistingelementsandsystemsandtheircritical
10 componentsandconnections.Iftherearenodrawingsofthebuilding,thelicenseddesign
11 professionalshouldperformathoroughinvestigationofthebuildingtoidentifytheseelements,
12 systems,andcomponentsasdescribedinSection2.3.
13
14 2.2.3 Test Methods to Quantify Material Properties
15 2.2.3.1 GeneralDestructive and nondestructive test methods used to obtain in-place mechanical
16 properties of materials identified in Section 2.2.1 and component properties identified in Section
17 2.2.2 are specified in this section. Samples of concrete and reinforcing and connector steel shall
18 be examined for physical condition as specified in Section 2.3.2.
19 When determining material properties with the removal and testing of samples for laboratory
20 analysis, sampling shall take place in primary gravity- and seismic-force-resisting components in
21 regions with the least stress.
22 Where Section 2.2.4.2.1 does not apply and the coefficient of variation is greater than 20%, the
23 expected concrete strength shall not exceed the mean less one standard deviation.
Page 11 of 217
1 2.2.3.2 SamplingFor concrete material testing, the sampling program shall include the removal
2 of standard cores. Core drilling shall be preceded by nondestructive location of the reinforcing
3 steel, and core holes shall be located to avoid damage to or drilling through the reinforcing steel. Core
4 holes shall be filled with concrete or grout of comparable strength having nonshrinkage properties. If
5 conventional reinforcing steel is tested, sampling shall include removal of local bar segments and
6 installation of replacement spliced material to maintain continuity of the reinforcing bar for
7 transfer of bar force unless an analysis confirms that replacement of the original components is
8 not required.
9 Removal of core samples and performance of laboratory destructive testing shall be permitted to
10 determine existing concrete strength properties. Removal of core samples shall use the procedures
11 included in ASTM C42. Testing shall follow the procedures contained in ASTM C42, ASTM C39,
12 and ASTM C496. Core strength shall be converted to in-place concrete compressive strength by
13 an approved procedure.
14 Removal of bar or tendon samples and performance of laboratory destructive testing shall be
15 permitted to determine existing reinforcing steel strength properties. The tensile yield and ultimate
16 strengths for reinforcing and prestressing steels shall follow the procedures included in ASTM
17 A370. Reinforcing samples that are slightly damaged during removal are permitted to be machined
18 to a round bar as long as the tested area is at least 70% of the gross area of the original bar.
19 Prestressing materials shall meet the supplemental requirements in ASTM A416, ASTM A421, or
20 ASTM A722, depending on material type. Properties of connector steels shall be permitted to be
21 determined by wet and dry chemical composition tests and direct tensile and compressive strength
22 tests as specified by ASTM A370. Where strength, construction quality or both of anchors or
Page 12 of 217
1 embedded connectors are required to be determined, in-place testing shall satisfy the provisions of
2 ASTM E488-96.
4 C2.2.3.2SamplingACI214.4RandFEMA274providefurtherguidanceoncorrelatingconcrete
5 corestrengthtoinplacestrengthandprovidereferencesforvarioustestmethodsthatcanbe
6 usedtoestimatematerialproperties.Chemicalcompositioncanbedeterminedfromretrieved
7 samplestoassesstheconditionoftheconcrete.SectionC6.3.3.2ofFEMA274(1997b)provides
8 referencesforthesetests.
9 Whenconcretecoresaretaken,careshouldbetakenwhenpatchingtheholes.Forexample,a
10 corethroughthethicknessofaslabshouldhavepositiveanchoragebyrougheningthesurface
11 andpossiblydowelsforanchorage.Forthatcase,theholesshouldbefilledwithconcreteorgrout
12 andtheengineershouldprovidedirectionforfillingtheholesothattheaddedconcreteorgrout
13 bondstothesubstrate.
14 Thereinforcingsteelsystemusedintheconstructionofaspecificbuildingisusuallyofuniform
15 gradeandsimilarstrength.Onegradeofreinforcementisoccasionallyusedforsmalldiameter
16 bars,likethoseusedforstirrupsandhoops,andanothergradeforlargediameterbars,likethose
17 usedforlongitudinalreinforcement.Insomecases,differentconcretedesignstrengthsorclasses
18 are used. Historical research and industry documents contain insight on material mechanical
19 propertiesusedindifferentconstructioneras(Section2.2.5).Thisinformationcanbeusedwith
20 laboratory and field test data to gain confidence in inplace strength properties. Undamaged
21 reinforcingsteelcanbereducedtoasmoothbar,aslongasthesamplesmeettherequirements
Page 13 of 217
1 of ASTM A370, excluding the limitations of Annex 9. This type of reinforcing would occur in a
2 situationwhereonlyalimitedlengthofbarcanberemovedfortesting.
4 2.2.4 Minimum Number of TestsMaterials testing is not required if material properties are
5 available from original construction documents that include material test records or reports.
6 Material test records or reports shall be representative of all critical components of the building
7 structure.
8 Based on Section 6.2 of ASCE 41, data collection from material tests is classified as either
9 comprehensive or usual. The minimum number of tests for usual data collection is specified in
10 Section 2.2.4.1. The minimum number of tests necessary to quantify properties by in-place testing
11 for comprehensive data collection is specified in Section 2.2.4.2. If the existing gravity-load-
12 resisting-system or seismic-force-resisting system is replaced during the retrofit process, material
13 testing is only required to quantify properties of existing materials at new connection points.
14
15 C2.2.4MinimumNumberofTestsToquantifyinplacepropertiesaccurately,itisessentialthat
16 aminimumnumberoftestsbeconductedonprimarycomponentsoftheseismicforceresisting
17 system.Theminimumnumberoftestsisdictatedbytheavailabilityoforiginalconstructiondata,
18 structuralsystemtypeused,desiredaccuracy,qualityandconditionofinplacematerials,levelof
19 seismicity,andtargetperformancelevel.Accessibilitytothestructuralsystemcaninfluencethe
20 testing program scope. The focus of testing should be on primary seismicforceresisting
21 components and specific properties for analysis. Test quantities provided in this section are
22 minimal;thelicenseddesignprofessionalshoulddeterminewhetherfurthertestingisneededto
23 evaluateasbuiltconditions.
Page 14 of 217
1 Testingisgenerallynotrequiredoncomponentsotherthanthoseoftheseismicforceresisting
2 system.
3 Thelicenseddesignprofessionalandsubcontractedtestingagencyshouldcarefullyexaminetest
4 results to verify that suitable sampling and testing procedures were followed and appropriate
5 valuesfortheanalysiswereselectedfromthedata.
7 2.2.4.1 Usual Data CollectionThe minimum number of tests to determine concrete and
8 reinforcing steel material properties for usual data collection shall be based on the following
9 criteria:
10 1. If the specified design strength of the concrete is known, at least one core shall be
11 taken from samples of each different concrete strength used in the construction of the
12 building, with a minimum of three cores taken for the entire building;
13 2. If the specified design strength of the concrete is not known, at least one core shall be
14 taken from each type of seismic-force-resisting component, with a minimum of six
15 cores taken for the entire building;
16 3. If the specified design strength of the reinforcing steel is known, nominal or specified
17 material properties shall be permitted without additional testing; and
18 4. If the specified design strength of the reinforcing steel is not known, at least two
19 strength test coupons of reinforcing steel shall be removed from the building for
20 testing.
21 5. Cast-in-place or post-installed anchors shall be classified in groups of similar type,
22 size, geometry and structural use. In groups of anchors used for out-of-plane wall
23 anchorage and in groups of anchors whose failure in tension or shear would cause
Page 15 of 217
1 the structure not to meet the selected Performance Objective, 5% of the anchors with
2 a minimum of three anchors of each anchor group shall be tested in-place in tension
3 to establish an available strength, construction quality or both. The test load shall be
4 specified by the licensed design professional and shall be based on the anticipated
5 demand or strength in accordance with available construction information. If the test
6 load is used as the basis for anchor strength calculation, the available anchor strength
7 shall not be taken greater than 2/3 of the test load. Testing of the anchors to failure is
8 not required and a test load lower than the expected failure load shall be permitted.
9 If the test load is not achieved in one or more anchors tested in a group, anchors in
10 that group shall be tested under a tensile load smaller than that specified for the
11 preceding tests. Otherwise, the strength of the tested anchor group shall be ignored.
12 Testing in accordance with 2.2.4.2.5 shall be permitted to determine the available
13 strength based on a statistical distribution of the test results.
Page 16 of 217
1 2.2.4.2 Comprehensive Data Collection
2 2.2.4.2.1 Coefficient of VariationUnless specified otherwise, a minimum of three tests shall be
3 conducted to determine any property. If the coefficient of variation exceeds 20%, additional tests
4 shall be performed until the coefficient of variation is equal to or less than 20%. If additional
5 testing does not reduce the coefficient of variation below 20%, a knowledge factor reduction per
6 Section 4.4 shall be used. In determining coefficient of variation, cores shall be grouped by grades
7 of concrete and element type. The number of tests in a single component shall be limited so as not
8 to compromise the integrity of the component.
9 2.2.4.2.2 Concrete MaterialsFor each concrete element type of the seismic-force-resisting
10 system, as well as secondary systems for which failure could result in a collapse hazard, a
11 minimum of three core samples shall be taken and subjected to compression tests. A minimum of
12 six total tests shall be performed on a building for concrete strength determination, subject to the
13 limitations of this section. If varying concrete classes or grades were used in the building
14 construction, a minimum of three samples and tests shall be performed for each class and grade.
15 The modulus of elasticity and tensile strength shall be permitted to be estimated from the
16 compressive strength testing data. Samples shall be taken from components, distributed throughout
17 the building, that are critical to the structural behavior of the building.
18 Tests shall be performed on samples from components that are identified as damaged or degraded
19 to quantify their condition. Test results from areas of degradation shall be compared with strength
20 values specified in the construction documents. If test values less than the specified strength in the
21 construction documents are found, further strength testing shall be performed to determine the cause
22 or identify the degree of damage or degradation.
Page 17 of 217
1 The minimum number of tests to determine compressive strength of each concrete element type
2 shall conform to one of the following criteria:
3 1. For concrete elements for which the specified design strength is known and test results
4 are not available, a minimum of three core tests shall be conducted for each floor level,
5 400 yd3 (306 m3) of concrete, or 10,000 ft2 (930 m2) of surface area, whichever requires
6 the most frequent testing; or
7 2. For concrete elements for which the specified design strength is unknown and test
8 results are not available, a minimum of six core tests shall be conducted for each floor
9 level, 400 yd3 (306 m3) of concrete, or 10,000 ft2 (930 m2) of surface area, whichever
10 requires the most frequent testing. Where the results indicate that different classes of
11 concrete were used, the degree of testing shall be increased to confirm class use.
12 3. Alternately, for concrete elements for which the design strength is known or unknown,
13 and test results are not available, it is permitted to determine the lower bound
14 compressive strength based on core sample testing and applying the provisions in
15 Section 6.4.3 of ACI 562-16. If the lower bound compressive strength is determined in
16 this manner, the expected compressive strength shall be determined as the lower bound
17 compressive strength value obtained from ACI 562-16 Equation 6.4.3 plus one standard
18 deviation of the strength of the core samples. When following the provisions in Section
19 6.4.3 of ACI 562-16, the minimum number of samples per element type shall be four.
20 The sample locations shall be:
21 a. Distributed to quantify element material properties throughout the height of
22 the building
23 b. Distributed to quantify element material properties in locations critical to the
Page 18 of 217
1 structural system being investigated.
3 Quantification of concrete strength via ultrasonics or other nondestructive test methods shall not
4 be substituted for core sampling and laboratory testing.
6 C2.2.4.2.2ConcreteMaterialsACI214.4Rprovidesguidanceoncoringinexistingstructuresand
7 interpretationofcorecompressivestrengthtestresults.
8 Ifastructurewasconstructedinphasesorifconstructiondocumentsfordifferentpartsofthe
9 structure were issued at separate times, the licensed design professional, for the purpose of
10 determiningsamplingsize,shouldconsidertheconcreteineachconstructionphaseorineachset
11 ofconstructiondocumentsasofdifferenttype.Section6.4.3ofACI56216providesamethodto
12 calculateanequivalentspecifiedconcretestrengthfcbasedonstatisticalanalysisofcompression
13 strength test results from core samples. ASTM E178 provides guidance on consideration of
14 outliers in a set of core samples. Equation 6.4.3 in Section 6.4.3 of ACI 56216 defines the
15 equivalentspecifiedcompressivestrengthofconcreteasafunctionofthenumberoftests,the
16 coefficientofvariationofthesamples,andafactortoaccountforthenumberofsamples.Section
17 6.4.3 of ACI 56216 permits the engineer to select the number of samples used to evaluate
18 concretecompressivestrengthbutimposesapenaltytotheresultstoaccountfortheuncertainty
19 associatedwiththenumberofsamples.
20 Equation6.4.3ofACI56216wasderivedwiththeobjectiveofcalculatingthe13%fractileofthe
21 inplace concrete compressive strength, which some studies have shown to be approximately
22 equaltothespecifiedcompressivestrengthofconcretefc(BartlettandMacGregor,1996).The
Page 19 of 217
1 firstterminEquation6.4.3ofACI56216representstheeffectofsamplesizeontheuncertainty
2 ofthemeaninplacestrength,wherethecoefficientkcisobtainedfromaStudentstdistribution
3 withn1degreesoffreedomanda90%confidencelevel.ThesecondterminEquation6.4.3ofACI
4 56216representstheuncertaintyattributabletocorrectionfactorsrelatingcylinderstrengthto
5 specified compressive strength, which were assumed to have a normal distribution, also
6 estimatedwitha90%confidencelevel.ThestudybyBartlettandMacGregor(1996)showedthat
7 thespecifiedcompressivestrengthfccorrespondsapproximatelytothe13%fractileofthe28
8 dayinplacestrengthinwallsandcolumns,andapproximatelythe23%fractileofthe28dayin
9 place compressive strength in beams and slabs. The former was considered to be a more
10 appropriatemeasureofspecifiedcompressivestrengthfcthanthelatterbecausethenominal
11 strength of columns is more sensitive to concrete compressive strength than the strength of
12 beamsandslabs(ACI214.4).
13 In Section 2.2.1.2 of this standard it is stated that nominal material properties or properties
14 specified in construction documents shall be taken as lowerbound material properties unless
15 otherwisespecified.Themethodtoestimateofthespecifiedconcretecompressivestrengthfcin
16 Section6.4.3ofACI56216wasadoptedinthisstandardtoobtainthelowerboundcompressive
17 strengthconsistentwiththeprovisionsinSection2.2.1.2.
18 ACI 214.4R provides guidance on coring in existing structures and interpretation of core
19 compressive strength test results. The minimum of 4 samples was adopted based on the
20 recommendationsinACI214.4.ThefollowingequationisprovidedinACI214.4
21
Page 20 of 217

1 (C1)
3 wherensamplesrepresentstheminimumnumberofsamples,COVpopulationrepresentstheestimated
4 coefficientofvariationofthepopulation,andepopulationrepresentsthepredeterminedmaximum
5 errorexpressedasapercentageofthepopulationaverage.Foratotalof4samplestheprevious
6 equationdictatesthatthemaximumerrorisequaltotheestimateofthecoefficientofvariation
7 ofthepopulation.BartlettandMacGregor(1995)reportthatformanybatchesofcastinplace
8 concrete, and samples obtained from many members, the coefficient of variation was
9 approximately13%.Ifthemaximumerrorisequaltothecoefficientofvariation,amaximumerror
10 of13%correspondstoapproximately1.13standarddeviations,whichisconsideredadequatefor
11 anestimateoflowerboundmaterialproperties.
12 Usersofthedocumentarecautionedthatforcoefficientsofvariationbetween13and20%,the
13 minimumnumberofsamplesneededtolimittheerrorbelowonestandarddeviationaccording
14 totherecommendationsinACI214.4ishigherthan4.Forexample,foracoefficientofvariation
15 of20%aminimumof7samplesisrecommendedtolimittheerrortoonestandarddeviation.If
16 the maximum error is reduced to 10% the minimum number of samples recommended is
17 significantlyhigher.Foracoefficientofvariationof15.87%(onestandarddeviationawayfrom
18 themean)andamaximumerrorof10%,theminimumnumberofsamplesrecommendedis11,
19 andforacoefficientofvariationof20%andamaximumerrorof10%,theminimumnumberof
20 samples recommended is 16. If the coefficient of variation exceeds 20%, the requirements in
21 Section2.2.4.2.1shallbesatisfied.
Page 21 of 217
1
2
3 Ultrasonics and nondestructive test methods should not be substituted for core sampling and
4 laboratorytestingastheydonotyieldaccuratestrengthvaluesdirectly.Thesemethodsshould
5 only be used for confirmation and comparison. Guidance for nondestructive test methods is
6 providedinACI228.2R.
8 2.2.4.2.3 Conventional Reinforcing and Connector SteelsTests shall be conducted to determine
9 both yield and ultimate strengths of reinforcing and connector steel. Connector steel is defined as
10 additional structural steel or miscellaneous metal used to secure precast and other concrete shapes
11 to the building structure. A minimum of three tensile tests shall be conducted on conventional
12 reinforcing steel samples from a building for strength determination, subject to the following
13 supplemental conditions:
14 1. If original construction documents defining properties exist, then at least three strength
15 coupons shall be removed from random locations from each element or component
16 type and tested; or
17 2. If original construction documents defining properties are unavailable, but the
18 approximate date of construction is known and a common material grade is confirmed,
19 at least three strength coupons shall be removed from random locations from each
20 element or component type for every three floors of the building; and
21 3. If the construction date is unknown, at least six strength coupons for every three floors
22 shall be performed.
23 Refer to Section 2.2.3.2 for replacement of sampled material.
Page 22 of 217
1 2.2.4.2.4 Prestressing SteelSampling prestressing steel tendons for laboratory testing shall only
2 be performed on prestressed components that are part of the seismic-force-resisting system.
3 Prestressed components in diaphragms shall be permitted to be excluded.
4 Tendon or prestress removal shall be avoided if possible. Any sampling of prestressing steel
5 tendons for laboratory testing shall be done with extreme care. It shall be permitted to determine
6 material properties without tendon or prestress removal by careful sampling of either the tendon
7 grip or the extension beyond the anchorage, if sufficient length is available.
8 All sampled prestressed steel shall be replaced with new, fully connected, and stressed material
9 and anchorage hardware, unless an analysis confirms that replacement of original components is
10 not required.
11 2.2.4.2.5 Cast-in-place or post-installed anchors Cast-in-place or post-installed anchors shall
12 be classified in groups in accordance with 2.2.4.1. In groups of anchors used for out-of-plane
13 wall anchorage and in groups of anchors whose failure in tension or shear would cause the
14 structure not to meet the selected Performance Objective, 10% of the anchors with a minimum of
15 six anchors of each anchor group shall be tested in-place to in tension to establish an available
16 strength, construction quality or both. Testing of the anchors to failure is not required. The test
17 load shall be specified by the licensed design professional and shall be based on the anticipated
18 demand or strength in accordance with available construction information. If the test load is
19 used as the basis for anchor strength calculation, the available anchor strength shall not be taken
20 greater than 2/3 of the test load. Testing of the anchors to failure is not required and a test load
21 lower than the expected failure load shall be permitted.
Page 23 of 217
1
2 C2.2.4.2.5CastinplaceorpostinstalledanchorsToestimateultimatestrengthofthe
3 anchorsinaccordancewithSection3.6,thefrequencyofthetestshouldbeincreasedtoatleast
4 25%oftheanchorsandthetestloadshouldbeatleastthenominaldesignstrengthin
5 accordancewithChapter17ofACI318. Inplaceanchortestingperformedinaccordancewith
6 2.2.4.2.5providestheminimumavailabletensilestrengthofasingleanchor,whichislikely
7 governedbypulloutorbondstrengthintension.Otherfailuremodesandparametersthataffect
8 thestrengthoftheanchors,suchasproximitytoedges,groupeffect,presenceofcracks,or
9 eccentricityofappliedloads,shouldbeconsideredinaccordancewithChapter17ofACI318.
10
11 2.2.5 Default PropertiesDefault material properties to determine component strengths shall be
12 permitted to be used in conjunction with the linear analysis procedures of ASCE 41 Chapter 7.
13 Default lower-bound concrete compressive strengths are specified in Table 2. Default expected
14 concrete compressive strengths shall be determined by multiplying lower-bound values by an
15 appropriate factor selected from Table 1, unless another factor is justified by test data. The
16 appropriate default compressive strength, lower-bound strength, or expected strength as specified
17 in ASCE 41 Section 7.5.1.3, shall be used to establish other strength and performance
18 characteristics for the concrete as needed in the structural analysis.
19 Default lower-bound values for reinforcing steel are specified for various ASTM specifications
20 and periods in Tables 3 or 4. Default expected strength values for reinforcing steel shall be
21 determined by multiplying lower-bound values by an appropriate factor selected from Table 1,
22 unless another factor is justified by test data. Where default values are assumed for existing
Page 24 of 217
1 reinforcing steel, welding or mechanical coupling of new reinforcement to the existing reinforcing
2 steel shall not be permitted.
3 The default lower-bound yield strength for steel connector material shall be taken as 27,000 lb/in.2
4 (186 MPa). The default expected yield strength for steel connector material shall be determined
5 by multiplying lower-bound values by an appropriate factor selected from Table 1, unless another
6 value is justified by test data.
7 The default lower-bound yield strength for cast-in-place or post-installed anchor material shall be
8 taken as 27,000 lb/in.2 (186 MPa) unless another value is justified by test data. Component actions
9 on the connections shall be considered as force-controlled actions and default expected yield
10 strength shall not be used.
11 The use of default values for prestressing steel in prestressed concrete construction shall not be
12 permitted.
13
14 C2.2.5DefaultPropertiesDefaultvaluesprovidedinthisstandardaregenerallyconservative.
15 Whereas the strength of reinforcing steel can be fairly consistent throughout a building, the
16 strengthofconcreteinabuildingcouldbehighlyvariable,givenvariabilityinconcretemixtures
17 and sensitivity to watercement ratio and curing practices. A conservative assumption based
18 upon the field observation of the concrete compressive strength in the given range is
19 recommended,unlessahigherstrengthissubstantiatedbyconstructiondocuments,testreports,
20 ormaterialtesting.Forthecapacityofanelementinquestion,thelowervaluewithintherange
21 canbeconservative.It canbeappropriatetousethemaximumvalue inagivenrangewhere
22 determiningtheforcecontrolledactionsonothercomponents.
Page 25 of 217
1 Untilabout1920,avarietyofproprietaryreinforcingsteelswasused.Yieldstrengthsarelikelyto
2 beintherangeof33,000to55,000lb/in.2(230to380MPa),buthighervaluesarepossibleand
3 actualyieldandtensilestrengthscanexceedminimumvalues.Oncecommonlyusedtodesignate
4 reinforcingsteelgrade,thetermsstructural,intermediate,andhardbecameobsoletein
5 1968.Plainandtwistedsquarebarswereoccasionallyusedbetween1900and1949.
6 Factorstoconvertdefaultreinforcingsteelstrengthtoexpectedstrengthincludeconsiderationof
7 materialoverstrengthandstrainhardening.
9 2.3 Condition Assessment
10 2.3.1 GeneralA condition assessment of the existing building and site conditions shall be
11 performed as specified in this section.
12 The condition assessment shall include the following:
13 1. Examination of the physical condition of primary and secondary components, and the
14 presence of any degradation shall be noted;
15 2. Verification of the presence and configuration of components and their connections,
16 and the continuity of load paths between components, elements, and systems;
17 3. A review and documentation of other conditions, including neighboring party walls
18 and buildings, presence of nonstructural components and mass, and prior remodeling;
19 4. Collection of information needed to select a knowledge factor in accordance with
20 Section 4.4; and
21 5. Confirmation of component orientation, plumbness, and physical dimensions.
Page 26 of 217
1
2 C2.3.1 GeneralThe condition assessment also affords an opportunity to review other
3 conditionsthatcaninfluenceconcreteelementsandsystemsandoverallbuildingperformance.
4 Of particular importance is the identification of other elements and components that can
5 contribute to or impair the performance of the concrete system in question, including infills,
6 neighboringbuildings,andequipmentattachments.Limitationsposedbyexistingcoverings,wall
7 andceilingspace,infills,andotherconditionsshallalsobedefinedsuchthatprudentretrofit
8 measurescanbeplanned.
10 2.3.2 Scope and ProceduresThe scope of the condition assessment shall include critical
11 structural components as described in the following subsections.
12 2.3.2.1 Visual Condition AssessmentDirect visual inspection of accessible and representative
13 primary components and connections shall be performed to
14 Identify configuration issues;
15 Determine if degradation is present;
16 Establish continuity of load paths;
17 Establish the need for other test methods to quantify the presence and degree of
18 degradation; and
19 Measure dimensions of existing construction to compare with available design information
20 and reveal any permanent deformations.
21 A visual building inspection shall include visible portions of foundations, seismic-force-resisting
22 members, diaphragms (slabs), and connections. As a minimum, a representative sampling of at
Page 27 of 217
1 least 20% of the components and connections shall be visually inspected at each floor level. If
2 significant damage or degradation is found, the assessment sample of all similar-type critical
3 components in the building shall be increased to 40% or more, as necessary, to accurately assess the
4 performance of components and connections with degradation.
5 If coverings or other obstructions exist, partial visual inspection through the obstruction shall be
6 permitted to be performed using drilled holes and a fiberscope.
8 C2.3.2.1 Visual Condition AssessmentFurther guidance can be found in ACI 201.1R, which
9 providesasystemforreportingtheconditionofconcreteinservice.
10
11 2.3.2.2 Comprehensive Condition AssessmentExposure is defined as local minimized removal
12 of cover concrete and other materials to inspect reinforcing system details. All damaged concrete
13 cover shall be replaced after inspection. The following criteria shall be used for assessing primary
14 connections in the building for comprehensive data collection:
15 1. If detailed design drawings exist, exposure of at least three different primary
16 connections shall occur, with the connection sample including different types of
17 connections (for example, beamcolumn, columnfoundation, beamdiaphragm, and
18 diaphragm-wall). If no deviations from the drawings exist or if the deviations from the
19 drawings are consistently similar, it shall be permitted to consider the sample as being
20 representative of installed conditions. If inconsistent deviations are noted, then at least
21 25% of the specific connection type shall be inspected to identify the extent of
22 deviation; or
Page 28 of 217
1 2. In the absence of detailed design drawings, at least three connections of each primary
2 connection type shall be exposed for inspection. If common detailing among the three
3 connections is observed, it shall be permitted to consider this condition as representative
4 of installed conditions. If variations are observed among like connections, additional
5 connections shall be inspected until an accurate understanding of building construction
6 is gained.
7 2.3.2.3 Additional TestingIf additional destructive and nondestructive testing is required to
8 determine the degree of damage or presence of deterioration, or to understand the internal
9 condition and quality of concrete, test methods approved by the licensed design professional shall
10 be used.
11
12 C2.3.2.3AdditionalTestingThephysicalconditionofcomponentsandconnectorsaffectstheir
13 performance. The need to accurately identify the physical condition can dictate the need for
14 certain additional destructive and nondestructive test methods. Such methods can be used to
15 determinethedegreeofdamageorpresenceofdeteriorationandtoimproveunderstandingof
16 theinternalconditionandconcretequality.Furtherguidelinesandproceduresfordestructiveand
17 nondestructiveteststhatcanbeusedintheconditionassessmentareprovidedinACI228.1R,ACI
18 228.2R,FEMA274(SectionC6.3.3.2),andFEMA306(Section3.8).
19 The nondestructive examination (NDE) methods having the greatest use and applicability to
20 conditionassessmentarelistedbelow:
21 Surface NDE methods include infrared thermography, delamination sounding, surface
22 hardnessmeasurement,andcrackmapping.Thesemethodscanbeusedtofindsurface
Page 29 of 217
1 degradationincomponentssuchasserviceinducedcracks,corrosion,andconstruction
2 defects;
3 VolumetricNDEmethods,includingradiographyandultrasonics,canbeusedtoidentify
4 thepresenceofinternaldiscontinuitiesandlossofsection.Impactechoultrasonicsisoften
5 usedandisawellunderstoodtechnology;
6 Onlinemonitoringusingacousticemissions,straingauges,inplacestaticordynamicload
7 tests, and ambient vibration tests can be used to assess structural condition and
8 performance.Monitoringisusedtodetermineifactivedegradationordeformationsare
9 occurring, whereas nondestructive load testing provides direct insight on loadcarrying
10 capacity;
11 Electromagneticmethodsusingapachometerorradiographycanbeusedtolocate,size,
12 or perform an initial assessment of reinforcing steel. Further assessment of suspected
13 corrosion activity should use electrical halfcell potential and resistivity measurements;
14 and
15 Liftofftesting(assumingoriginaldesignandinstallationdataareavailable),oranother
16 nondestructivemethodsuchasthecoringstressreliefspecifiedinSEI/ASCE11,can
17 be used where absolutely essentialto determine the levelof prestress remaining in an
18 unbondedprestressedsystem.
19
20 2.3.3 Basis for the Mathematical Building ModelResults of the condition assessment shall be
21 used to quantify the following items needed to create the mathematical building model:
22 1. Component section properties and dimensions;
Page 30 of 217
1 2. Component configuration and the presence of any eccentricities or permanent
2 deformation;
3 3. Connection configuration and the presence of any eccentricities;
4 4. Presence and effect of alterations to the structural system since original
5 construction; and
6 5. Interaction of nonstructural components and their involvement in seismic force
7 resistance.
8 All deviations between available construction records and as-built conditions obtained from visual
9 inspection shall be accounted for in the structural analysis.
10 Unless concrete cracking, reinforcement corrosion, or other mechanisms of degradation are
11 observed in the condition assessment as the cause for damage or reduced capacity, the cross-
12 sectional area and other sectional properties shall be assumed to be those from the design drawings
13 after adjustment for as-built conditions. If some sectional material loss has occurred, the loss shall
14 be quantified by direct measurement and sectional properties reduced accordingly using the
15 principles of structural mechanics.
16 2.4 Knowledge FactorA knowledge factor () for computation of concrete component
17 acceptance criteria shall be selected in accordance with ASCE 41 Section 6.2.4 with additional
18 requirements specific to concrete components. A knowledge factor, equal to 0.75 shall be used if
19 any of the following criteria are met:
20 1. Components are found to be damaged or deteriorated during assessment, and
21 further testing is not performed to quantify their condition or justify the use of
22 higher values of ;
23 2. Mechanical properties have a coefficient of variation exceeding 20%; and
Page 31 of 217
1 3. Components contain archaic or proprietary material and the condition is uncertain.
3 CHAPTER 3 GENERAL ASSUMPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
4 3.1Modeling and Design
5 3.1.1 GeneralSeismic retrofit of a concrete building involves the design of new components
6 connected to the existing structure, seismic upgrading of existing components, or both. New
7 components shall comply with ACI 318, except as otherwise indicated in this standard.
8 Original and retrofitted components of an existing building are not expected to satisfy provisions
9 of ACI 318 but shall be assessed using the provisions of this standard. Brittle or low-ductility
10 failure modes shall be identified as a part of the seismic evaluation.
11 Evaluation of demands and capacities of reinforced concrete components shall include
12 consideration of locations along the length where seismic force and gravity loads produce
13 maximum effects; where changes in cross section or reinforcement result in reduced strength; and
14 where abrupt changes in cross section or reinforcement, including splices, can produce stress
15 concentrations that result in premature failure.
16 C3.1.1GeneralBrittleorlowductilityfailuremodestypicallyincludebehaviorindirectornearly
17 direct compression; shear in slender components and incomponent connections; torsion in
18 slender components; and reinforcement development, splicing, and anchorage. The stresses,
19 forces,andmomentsactingtocausethesefailuremodesshouldbedeterminedfromalimitstate
20 analysis,consideringprobableresistancesatlocationsofnonlinearaction.
21
22 3.1.2 StiffnessComponent stiffnesses shall be calculated considering shear, flexure, axial
23 behavior, and reinforcement slip deformations. Stress state of the component, cracking extent
Page 32 of 217
1 caused by volumetric changes from temperature and shrinkage, deformation levels under gravity
2 loads and seismic forces shall be considered. Gravity load effects considered for effective
3 stiffnesses of components shall be determined using ASCE/SEI 41 Equation 7-3.
4
5 C3.1.2 StiffnessFor columns withlowaxialloads(below approximately 0.1Agfc), deformations
6 causedbybarslipcanaccountforasmuchas50%ofthetotaldeformationsatyield.Further
7 guidance regarding calculation of the effective stiffness of reinforced concrete columns that
8 includetheeffectsofflexure,shear,andbarslipcanbefoundinElwoodandEberhard(2009).
9 Flexurecontrolledwallstiffnesscanvaryfromapproximately0.15EcEIg to 0.5EcEIg,dependingon
10 wall reinforcement and axial load. A method for calculating wall stiffness which provides
11 compatibilitywithfibersectionanalysisisofferedinC7.2.2.
12
13 3.1.2.1 Linear ProceduresWhere design actions are determined using the linear procedures of
14 ASCE 41 Chapter 7, component effective stiffnesses shall correspond to the secant value to the
15 yield point of the component. Alternate stiffnesses shall be permitted where it is demonstrated by
16 analysis to be appropriate for the design loading. Alternatively, effective stiffness values in Table
17 5 shall be permitted.
18
19 C3.1.2.1 Linear ProceduresThe effective flexural rigidity values in Table 5 for beams and
20 columnsaccountfortheadditionalflexibilityfromreinforcementslipwithinthebeamcolumn
21 jointorfoundationbeforeyielding.Thevaluesspecifiedforcolumnsweredeterminedbasedona
22 databaseof221rectangularreinforcedconcretecolumntestswithaxialloadslessthan0.67Agfc
23 andshearspandepthratiosgreaterthan1.4.Measuredeffectivestiffnessesfromthelaboratory
Page 33 of 217
1 testdatasuggestthattheeffectiveflexuralrigidityforlowaxialloadscouldbeapproximatedas
2 0.2EIg; however, considering the scatter in the effective flexural rigidity and to avoid
3 underestimatingthesheardemandoncolumnswithlowaxialloads,0.3EIgisrecommendedin
4 Table5(Elwoodetal.2007).Inadditiontoaxialload,theshearspandepthratioofthecolumn
5 influencestheeffectiveflexuralrigidity.Amorerefinedestimateoftheeffectiveflexuralrigidity
6 canbedeterminedbycalculatingthedisplacementatyieldcausedbyflexure,slip,andshear
7 (ElwoodandEberhard2009).
8 The modeling recommendations for beamcolumn joints (Section 6.2.2.1) do not include the
9 influenceofreinforcementslip.Whentheeffectivestiffnessvaluesforbeamsandcolumnsfrom
10 Table5areusedincombinationwiththemodelingrecommendationsforbeamcolumnjoints,
11 the overall stiffness is in close agreement with results from beamcolumn subassembly tests
12 (Elwoodetal.2007).
13 Theeffectofreinforcementslipcanbeaccountedforbyincludingrotationalspringsattheends
14 ofthebeamorcolumnelements(Saatciogluetal.1992).Ifthismodelingoptionisselected,the
15 effectiveflexuralrigidityofthecolumnelementshouldreflectonlytheflexibilityfromflexural
16 deformations.Inthiscase,foraxialloadslessthan0.3Agfc,theeffectiveflexuralrigiditycanbe
17 estimatedas0.5EIg,withlinearinterpolationtothevaluegiveninTable5foraxialloadsgreater
18 than0.5Agfc.
19 Because of low bond stress between concrete and plain reinforcement without deformations,
20 componentswithplainlongitudinalreinforcementandaxialloadslessthan0.5Agfccanhavelower
21 effectiveflexuralrigidityvaluesthaninTable5.
Page 34 of 217
1
2 3.1.2.2 Nonlinear ProceduresWhere design actions are determined using the nonlinear
3 procedures of ASCE 41 Chapter 7, component load-deformation response shall be represented by
4 nonlinear load-deformation relations. Linear relations shall be permitted where nonlinear response
5 does not occur in the component. The nonlinear load-deformation relation shall be based on
6 experimental evidence or taken from quantities specified in Chapters 4 through 12. For the nonlinear
7 static procedure (NSP), the generalized load-deformation relation shown in Fig. 1 or other curves
8 defining behavior under monotonically increasing deformation shall be permitted. For the nonlinear
9 dynamic procedure (NDP), load-deformation relations shall define behavior under monotonically
10 increasing lateral deformation and under multiple reversed deformation cycles as specified in Section
11 3.2.1.
12 The generalized load-deformation relation shown in Fig. 1 shall be described by linear response from
13 A (unloaded component) to an effective yield B, then a linear response at reduced stiffness from
14 point B to C, then sudden reduction in seismic force resistance to point D, then response at reduced
15 resistance to E, and final loss of resistance thereafter. The slope from point A to B shall be
16 determined according to Section 3.1.2.1. The slope from point B to C, ignoring effects of gravity
17 loads acting through lateral displacements, shall be taken between zero and 10% of the initial slope,
18 unless an alternate slope is justified by experiment or analysis. Point C shall have an ordinate equal
19 to the strength of the component and an abscissa equal to the deformation at which significant
20 strength degradation begins. Representation of the load-deformation relation by points A, B, and
21 C only (rather than all points AE) shall be permitted if the calculated response does not exceed
22 point C. Numerical values for the points identified in Fig. 1 shall be as specified in Sections 3.2.2.2
23 for beams, columns, and joints, 3.3.2.2 for post-tensioned beams, 3.4.2.2 for slabcolumn
Page 35 of 217
1 connections, and 7.2.2 for shear walls, wall segments, and coupling beams. Other load-
2 deformation relations shall be permitted if justified by experimental evidence or analysis.
3
4 C3.1.2.2NonlinearProceduresTypically,theresponseshowninFig.1isassociatedwithflexural
5 response or tension response. In this case, the resistance at Q/Qy = 1.0 is the yield value, and
6 subsequentstrainhardeningisaccommodatedbyhardeningintheloaddeformationrelationas
7 the member is deformed toward the expected strength. Where theresponseshowninFig.1is
8 associatedwithcompression, the resistance at Q/Qy = 1.0 typically is thevaluewhereconcrete
9 begins to spall, and strain hardening in wellconfined sections can be associated with strain
10 hardeningofthelongitudinalreinforcementandanincreaseinstrengthfromtheconfinementof
11 concrete.WheretheresponseshowninFig.1isassociatedwithshear,theresistanceatQ/Qy=
12 1.0typicallyisthevalueatwhichthedesignshearstrengthisreachedand,typically,nostrain
13 hardeningfollows.
14 ThedeformationsusedfortheloaddeformationrelationofFig.1shallbedefinedinoneoftwo
15 ways,asfollows:
16 Deformation,orTypeI:Inthiscurve,deformationsareexpresseddirectlyusingtermssuch as
17 strain, curvature, rotation, or elongation. The parameters anl and bnl refer to deformation
18 portionsthatoccurafteryield,orplasticdeformation.Theparametercnlisthereducedresistance
19 afterthesuddenreductionfromCtoD.Parametersanl,bnl,andcnlaredefinednumericallyin
20 various tables in this standard. Alternatively, parameters anl, bnl, and cnl can be determined
21 directlybyanalyticalproceduresjustifiedbyexperimentalevidence.
Page 36 of 217
1 DeformationRatio,orTypeII:Inthiscurve,deformationsareexpressedintermssuchasshear
2 angleandtangentialdriftratio.Theparametersdnlandenlrefertototaldeformationsmeasured
3 from the origin. Parameters cnl, dnl, and enl are defined numerically in various tables in this
4 standard. Alternatively, parameters cnl, dnl, and enl can be determined directly by analytical
5 proceduresjustifiedbyexperimentalevidence.
6 Provisions for determining alternative modeling parameters and acceptance criteria based on
7 experimentalevidencearegiveninASCE41Section7.6.
8 Displacementdemandsdeterminedfromnonlineardynamic analysis are sensitive to the rate of
9 strength degradation included in the structural model. Unless there is experimental evidence of
10 suddenstrengthlossforaparticularcomponentunderconsideration,theuseofamodelwitha
11 suddenstrengthlossfrompointCtoDinFig.1canresultinoverestimationofthedriftdemands
12 for a structural system and individual components. A more realistic model for many concrete
13 componentswouldhavealineardegradationinresistancefrompointCtoE.
14 Strengthlossthatoccurswithinasinglecyclecanresultindynamicinstabilityofthestructure,
15 whereasstrengthlossthatoccursbetweencyclesisunlikelytocausesuchinstability.Fig.1doesnot
16 distinguish between these types of strength degradation and may not accurately predict the
17 displacementdemandsifthetwoformsofstrengthdegradationarenotproperlyconsidered.
18
19 3.1.3 Flanged ConstructionIn beams consisting of a web and flange that act integrally, the
20 combined stiffness and strength for flexural and axial loading shall be calculated considering a
21 width of effective flange on each side of the web equal to the smallest of:
22 1. The provided flange width;
Page 37 of 217
1 2. Eight times the flange thickness;
2 3. Half the distance to the next web; or
3 4. One-fifth of the beam span length.
4 Where the flange is in compression, the concrete and reinforcement within the effective width
5 shall be considered effective in resisting flexure and axial load. Where the flange is in tension,
6 longitudinal reinforcement within the effective width of the flange and developed beyond the
7 critical section shall be considered fully effective for resisting flexural and axial loads. The portion
8 of the flange extending beyond the width of the web shall be assumed ineffective in resisting
9 shear.
10 In walls, effective flange width should be computed using Chapter 18 of ACI 318.
11
12 3.2 Strength and Deformability
13 3.2.1 GeneralActions in a structure shall be classified as being either deformation-controlled or
14 force-controlled. Deformation-controlled actions are defined by the designation of linear and
15 nonlinear acceptance criteria in Tables 7 through 10 and 13 through 22. Where linear and nonlinear
16 acceptance criteria are not specified in the tables, actions shall be taken as force-controlled unless
17 component testing is performed in accordance with ASCE 41 Section 7.6. Strengths for deformation-
18 controlled and force-controlled actions shall be calculated in accordance with Sections 3.2.2 and 3.2.3,
19 respectively.
20 Components shall be classified as having low, moderate, or high ductility demands, according to
21 Section 3.2.4.
Page 38 of 217
1 Where strength and deformation capacities are derived from test data, the tests shall be representative
2 of proportions, details, and stress levels for the component and comply with Section 7.6.1 of
3 ASCE 41.
4 The strength and deformation capacities of concrete members shall correspond to values resulting
5 from a loading protocol involving three fully reversed cycles to the design deformation level, in
6 addition to similar cycles to lesser deformation levels, unless a larger or smaller number of
7 deformation cycles is determined considering earthquake duration and dynamic properties of the
8 structure.
9
10 C3.2.1GeneralInthisstandard,actionsareclassifiedaseitherdeformationcontrolledorforce
11 controlled.Actionsareconsideredtobedeformationcontrolledwherethecomponentbehavior
12 iswelldocumentedbytestresults.Wherelinearornonlinearacceptancecriteriaaretabulatedin
13 thisstandard,thecommitteehasjudgedtheactiontobedeformationcontrolledandexpected
14 materialpropertiesshouldbeused.Wheresuchacceptancecriteriaarenotspecified,theaction
15 should be assumed forcecontrolled, thereby requiring the use of lowerbound material
16 properties, or the licensed design professional can opt to perform testing to validate the
17 classificationofdeformationcontrolled.ASCE41Section7.6providesguidanceonproceduresto
18 befollowedduringtesting,andASCE41Section7.5.1.2providesamethodologybasedonthetest
19 data to distinguish forcecontrolled from deformationcontrolled actions. Further guidance on the
20 testingofmomentframecomponentscanbefoundinACI374.1.
21 In some cases, including shortperiod buildings and those subjected to a longduration design
22 earthquake,abuildingcanbeexpectedtobesubjectedtoadditionalcyclestothedesigndeformation
23 levelsbeyondthethreecyclesrecommendedinSection3.2.1.Theincreasednumberofcyclescan
Page 39 of 217
1 leadtoreductionsinresistanceanddeformationcapacity.Theeffectsonstrengthanddeformation
2 capacityofadditionaldeformationcyclesshouldbeconsideredindesign.
4 3.2.2 Deformation-Controlled ActionsStrengths used for deformation-controlled actions shall
5 be taken as equal to expected strengths QCE obtained experimentally or calculated using accepted
6 principles of mechanics. Unless specified in this standard, other procedures specified in ACI 318 to
7 calculate strengths shall be permitted, except that the strength reduction factor shall be taken
8 equal to unity. Deformation capacities for acceptance of deformation-controlled actions
9 calculated by nonlinear procedures shall be as specified in Chapters 4 through 12 of this standard. For
10 components constructed of lightweight concrete, QCE shall be modified in accordance with ACI 318
11 procedures for lightweight concrete.
12
13 C3.2.2DeformationControlledActionsExpectedyieldstrengthofreinforcingsteel,asspecified
14 inSection4.2.1.2,includesmaterialoverstrengthconsiderations.
15
16 3.2.3 Force-Controlled ActionsStrengths used for force-controlled actions shall be taken as
17 lower-bound strengths QCL, obtained experimentally or calculated using established principles of
18 mechanics. Lower-bound strength is defined as the mean less one standard deviation of
19 resistance expected over the range of deformations and loading cycles to which the concrete
20 component is likely to be subjected. Where calculations are used to define lower-bound
21 strengths, lower-bound estimates of material properties shall be used. Unless other procedures
22 are specified in this standard, procedures specified in ACI 318 to calculate strengths shall be
23 permitted, except that the strength reduction factor shall be taken equal to unity. For
Page 40 of 217
1 components constructed of lightweight concrete, QCL shall be modified in accordance with ACI
2 318 procedures for lightweight concrete.
4 3.2.4 Component Ductility Demand ClassificationTable 6 provides classification of component
5 ductility demands as low, moderate, or high based on the maximum value of the demandcapacity
6 ratio (DCR) defined in ASCE 41 Section 7.3.1.1 for linear procedures or the calculated
7 displacement ductility for nonlinear procedures.
9 3.3Flexure and Axial Loads
10 Flexural strength of members with and without axial loads shall be calculated according to ACI
11 318 or by other demonstrated rational methods, such as sectional analysis using appropriate
12 concrete and steel constitutive models. Deformation capacity of members with and without axial
13 loads shall be calculated considering shear, flexure, and reinforcement slip deformations, or based
14 on acceptance criteria given in this standard. Strengths and deformation capacities of components
15 with monolithic flanges shall be calculated considering concrete and developed longitudinal
16 reinforcement within the effective flange width, as defined in Section 3.1.3.
17 Strength and deformation capacities shall be determined based on the available development of
18 longitudinal reinforcement. Where longitudinal reinforcement has embedment or development
19 length that is insufficient for reinforcement strength development, flexural strength shall be
20 calculated based on limiting stress capacity of the embedded bar as defined in Section 3.5.
21 Where flexural deformation capacities are calculated from basic principles of mechanics,
22 reductions in deformation capacity caused by applied shear shall be considered. Where using
23 analytical models for flexural deformability that do not directly account for the effect of shear on
Page 41 of 217
1 deformation capacity and if the design shear equals or exceeds 6 f c' Aw , lb/in.2 ( 0.5 f c' Aw , MPa),
2 the design flexural deformation capacity shall not exceed 80% of the value calculated using the
3 analytical model.
4 For concrete columns or walls under combined axial load and biaxial bending, the combined
5 strength shall be evaluated considering biaxial bending. When using linear procedures, the axial
6 load PUF or PUD shall be calculated as a force-controlled action or deformation-controlled action
7 per ASCE 41 Section 7.5.2. The design moments MUD should be calculated about each of two
8 orthogonal axes. Combined strength shall be based on principles of mechanics with applied
9 bending moments calculated as MUDx/(mx) and MUDy/(my) about the x- and y-axes, respectively.
10 Acceptance shall be based on the applied bending moments lying within the expected strength
11 envelope calculated at an axial load level of PUF if the member is in compression or PUD /
12 [(minimum of mx and my)] if the member is in tension.
13
14 C3.3FlexureandAxialLoadsLaboratorytestsindicatethatflexuraldeformabilitycanbereduced
15 as coexisting shear forces increase. As flexural ductility demands increase, shear capacity
16 decreases,whichcanresultinashearfailurebeforetheoreticalflexuraldeformationcapacities
17 are reached. Use caution where flexural deformation capacities are determined by calculation.
18 FEMA306(ASCE41Section5.2)isaresourceforguidanceontheinteractionbetweenshearand
19 flexure.
20 Thecombinedstrengthunderuniaxialorbiaxialbendingwithaxialloadisdifficulttogeneralize
21 in a closedform solution, given the range of column section geometries encountered. For a
22 particularclassofrectangularcolumnsections,closedformsolutionsbasedonsectioncapacities
23 abouttheprincipalaxeshavebeendevelopedthatprovideexcellentagreementwhencompared
Page 42 of 217
1 toamoregeneralizedanalysis(Hsu1988,Furlongetal.2004).Acircularenvelopeprovidesapoor
2 predictionofthestrengthforallbutcircularcolumns.Forgeneralsections,thestrengthenvelope
3 shouldbedevelopedbasedonprinciplesofmechanics.
4 When flexural strength of an axially loaded member needs to be calculated in the linear
5 procedure, compressiveload levelshould be consideredasa forcecontrolled action dueto its
6 nonductile nature while, tensile load level should be considered as a deformationcontrolled
7 actionbecausethetensilestrengthandstiffnessofthememberarebasedonsteelreinforcement
8 contributiononly.Themfactorfortheflexuralbehaviorcanbeconservativelyusedtoestimate
9 thedeformationcontrolledactionduetothetension.
10
11 3.3.1 Usable Strain LimitsFor deformation- and force-controlled actions in elements without
12 confining transverse reinforcement, the maximum usable strain at the extreme concrete
13 compression fiber used to calculate the moment and axial strength shall not exceed:
14 a) 0.002 for members in nearly pure compression
15 b) 0.005 for other members
16 Larger values of maximum usable strain in the extreme compression fiber shall be allowed where
17 substantiated by experimental evidence.
18 For deformation- and force-controlled actions in elements with confined concrete, the maximum
19 usable strain at the extreme concrete compression fiber used to calculate moment and axial strength
20 shall be based on experimental evidence and consider limitations posed by transverse
21 reinforcement fracture, longitudinal reinforcement buckling, and degradation of component
22 resistance at large deformation levels. In the case of force-controlled actions in elements with
23 confined concrete, it shall be permitted to adopt usable strain limits for unconfined concrete.
Page 43 of 217
1 For deformation-controlled actions the maximum compressive strains in the longitudinal
2 reinforcement used to calculate the moment and axial strength shall not exceed 0.02, and
3 maximum tensile strains in longitudinal reinforcement shall not exceed 0.05. Monotonic coupon test
4 results shall not be used to determine reinforcement strain limits. If experimental evidence is used to
5 determine strain limits for reinforcement, the effects of low-cycle fatigue and transverse
6 reinforcement spacing and size shall be included in testing procedures.
7
8 C3.3.1 UsableStrainLimits
9 Earlyresearchonthestressstrainbehaviorofunconfinedconcrete(Hognestad,1952)hasshown
10 thatthestressstrainbehaviorofconcreteisdifferentinmemberssubjectedtoflexurethanin
11 memberssubjectedtonearlypurecompression.Concretesubjectedtoconcentriccompression
12 exhibitscrushingshortlyafterthemaximumstressisreachedatstrainsofapproximately0.0015
13 to 0.0020 (Hognestad, 1952), while crushing in the extreme compression fiber of members
14 subjectedtoflexureandaxialloadisobservedathigherstrains,rangingbetween0.003to0.005
15 (Hognestad,1952).Themaximumusablestrainlimitsestablishedinthissectionareintendedto
16 cautionengineerswhenusingstressstrainrelationshipsforconcretetocalculatemomentand
17 axial strengths. In members subjected to nearly pure compression, redistribution of stresses
18 withinthecompressionzoneafterthestrainintheconcreteexceedsthestraincorrespondingto
19 peakstress(0.0015to0.0020forunconfinedconcrete)(Hognestad,1952)isnotpossiblebecause
20 mostoftheconcreteinthecrosssectionwillbeonthedescendingbranchofthestressstrain
21 curveforconcrete.
22 Usablestrainlimitsspecifiedinthissectiondonotprecludeengineersfromusingtheprovisions
23 inSection22.2ofACI318.Section22.2.2.1ofACI318stipulatesthattocalculatethemomentand
Page 44 of 217
1 axial strength of reinforced concrete members, the maximum usable strain in the extreme
2 compressionfiberofreinforcedconcreteshallbeassumedtobe0.003.Thisusablestrainiswithin
3 thelimitof0.005specifiedinSection3.3.1ofthisstandard.Inthecaseofmemberssubjectedto
4 nearlypurecompression,provisionsinSection22.4.2ofACI318establishthatthedesignaxial
5 strengthofcolumnswithunconfinedconcreteshallnotexceed80%ofthenominalaxialstrength.
6 AccordingtothecommentaryofSection22.4.2.1ofACI318,thereducednominalaxialstrength
7 correspondstoaminimumeccentricityof5%ofthecolumndepth.Theusablestrainlimitof0.002
8 specified in Section 3.3.1 of this standard is intended to prevent overestimating the flexural
9 strengthofcolumnswithverysmalleccentricities,sotheprovisionsinSection22.4.2.1fortheACI
10 318Codecanbeusedinlieuofcalculatingtheaxialandmomentstrengthbasedonstressstrain
11 modelsforconcrete.
12 WhileprovisionsinSection21.2.2ofACI318establishthatfortensioncontrolledmembersthe
13 straininthereinforcementatfailureshallbeatleast0.005,thereisnoupperlimitinthecodefor
14 theusablestraininthereinforcementofbeamsandcolumns.Althoughanupperlimitinthestrain
15 at failure of beams and columns is implied in the provisions for minimum reinforcement in
16 Sections9.6and10.6ofACI318,thoselimitsarenotintendedformembersthatwillbesubjected
17 todeformationcyclesinthenonlinearrangeofresponse.Thereinforcementtensilestrainlimitin
18 Section5.3.1ofthisstandardisbasedonconsiderationoftheeffectsofmaterialpropertiesand
19 lowcycle fatigue. Lowcycle fatigue is influenced by spacing and size of transverse
20 reinforcement and strain history. Using extrapolated monotonic test results to develop tensile
21 strains greater than those specified above is not recommended. California Department of
22 Transportation (Caltrans) Seismic Design Criteria (Caltrans 2006) recommends an ultimate
Page 45 of 217
1 tensilestrainof0.09forNo.10(No.32)barsandsmaller,and0.06forNo.11(No.36)barsand
2 larger,forASTMA70660kip/in.2(420MPa)reinforcingbars.Alowerboundisselectedhere
3 consideringthevariabilityinmaterialsanddetailstypicallyfoundinexistingstructures.
4 Refer to Brown and Kunnath (2004) for incorporating the effects of lowcycle fatigue and
5 transversereinforcingfordeterminingstrainlimitsbasedontesting.
7 3.4Shear and Torsion
8 Strengths in shear and torsion shall be calculated according to ACI 318, except as modified in this
9 standard.
10 Within yielding regions of components with moderate or high ductility demands, shear and
11 torsional strength shall be calculated according to procedures for ductile components, such as the
12 provisions in Chapter 18 of ACI 318. Within yielding regions of components with low ductility
13 demands per Table 6 and outside yielding regions for all ductility demands, procedures for
14 effective elastic response, such as the provisions in Chapter 22 of ACI 318, shall be permitted to
15 calculate the design shear strength.
16 Unless otherwise noted, where the longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement exceeds half
17 the component effective depth measured in the direction of shear, transverse reinforcement shall
18 be assumed to have reduced effectiveness in resisting shear or torsion by a factor of 2(1-s/d).
19 Where the longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement exceeds the component effective
20 depth measured in the direction of shear, transverse reinforcement shall be assumed ineffective in
21 resisting shear or torsion. For beams and columns, lap-spliced transverse reinforcement shall be
22 assumed not more than 50% effective in regions of moderate ductility demand and ineffective in
23 regions of high ductility demand, and applies in addition to the effectiveness factor due to spacing.
Page 46 of 217
1 Shear friction strength shall be calculated according to ACI 318, considering the expected axial
2 load from gravity and earthquake effects. Where retrofit involves the addition of concrete requiring
3 overhead work with dry pack, the shear friction coefficient shall be taken as equal to 70% of the
4 value specified by ACI 318.
5
6 C3.4ShearandTorsionThereductionintheeffectivenessoftransversereinforcementinthis
7 sectionaccountsforthelimitednumberoftiesexpectedtocrossaninclinedcrackwhentiesare
8 provided at large spacing. Furthermore, reduction in the effectiveness of the transverse
9 reinforcementisneededsincethewidelyspacedtiesmaynotbefullydevelopedbothaboveand
10 below the crack. For tie spacing equal to the effective depth of the member, it is possible to
11 developaninclinedcrackthatdoesnotcrossanyties,andhencethecontributionofthetransverse
12 reinforcementshouldbeignored.
13
14 3.5Development and Splices of Reinforcement
15 Development of straight bars, hooked bars, and lap-spliced bars shall be calculated according to
16 the provisions of ACI 318, with the following modifications:
17 1. Deformed straight, hooked, and lap-spliced bars satisfying the development
18 requirements of Chapter 25 of ACI 318 using expected material properties, shall be
19 deemed capable of developing their yield strength, except as adjusted in the
20 following: (a) the development of lapped straight bars in tension without
21 consideration of lap splice classifications is permitted to be used as the required lap
22 splice length; (b) for columns, where deformed straight and lap-spliced bars pass
23 through regions where inelastic deformations and damage are expected, the bar
Page 47 of 217
1 length within those regions shall be considered effective for anchorage only until
2 inelastic deformations occur. In such cases, the development length obtained using
3 ACI 318 procedures shall be compared with a degraded available development
4 length (lb-deg) as defined in (2) below;
5 2. Where existing deformed straight bars, hooked bars, and lap-spliced bars do not
6 meet the development requirements of (1) above, the capacity of existing
7 reinforcement shall be calculated using Eq. 1:
8 1.25 / (1a)
9 If the maximum applied bar stress is larger than fs given in Eq. (1a), members shall
10 be deemed controlled by inadequate development or splicing.
11 For columns, where deformed straight and lap-spliced longitudinal bars pass
12 through regions where inelastic deformations and damage are expected, the bar
13 length within those regions shall be considered effective for anchorage only until
14 inelastic deformations occur. In such cases, if fs = fylL/E from Eq. (1a), the degraded
15 reinforcement capacity fs-deg accounting for the loss of anchorage in the damaged
16 region shall be evaluated using a degraded available development length (lb-deg). lb-
17 deg shall be evaluated by subtracting from lb a distance of 2/3d from the point of
18 maximum flexural demand in any direction damage is anticipated within the
19 column.
20 1.25 / (1b)
21 In cases where fs = fylL/E from Eq. (1a) but the maximum applied longitudinal bar
22 stress is larger than fs-deg given in Eq. (1b), columns shall be deemed controlled by
Page 48 of 217
1 inadequate development or splicing and the capacity of the existing reinforcement
2 taken as fylL/E;
3 3. For inadequate development or splicing of straight bars in beams and columns: for
4 nonlinear procedures it shall be permitted to assume that the reinforcement retains
5 the calculated maximum stress evaluated using Eq. (1a) up to the deformation levels
6 defined by anl in Tables 7, 8 and 9; for linear procedures, the calculated maximum
7 stress evaluated using Eq. (1a) shall be used for strength calculations. For members
8 other than beams and columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing
9 and hooked anchorage the developed stress shall be assumed to degrade from 1.0fs,
10 at a ductility demand or DCR equal to 1.0, to 0.2fs at a ductility demand or DCR
11 equal to 2.0;
12 4. Strength of deformed straight, discontinuous bars embedded in concrete sections or
13 beamcolumn joints, with clear cover over the embedded bar not less than 3db, shall
14 be calculated according to Eq. 2:
15 / (lb/in.2 units) (2)
16 / (MPa units)
17 Where fs is less than fyL/E and the calculated stress in the bar caused by design loads
18 equals or exceeds fs, the maximum developed stress shall be assumed to degrade
19 from 1.0fs, at a ductility demand or DCR equal to 1.0, to 0.2fs at a ductility demand
20 or DCR equal to 2.0. In beams with bottom bar embedment length into beam
21 column joints less than the requirements of ACI 318, flexural strength shall be
22 calculated considering the stress limitation of Eq. 2;
Page 49 of 217
1 5. For plain straight, hooked, and lap-spliced bars, development and splice lengths
2 shall be taken as twice the values determined in accordance with ACI 318, unless
3 other lengths are justified by approved tests; and
4 6. Doweled bars added in seismic retrofit shall be assumed to develop yield stress
5 where all the following conditions are satisfied:
6 a. Drilled holes for dowel bars are cleaned;
7 b. Embedment length le is not less than 10db and;
8 c. Minimum dowel bar spacing is not less than 4le and minimum edge distance
9 is not less than 2le.
10 Design values for dowel bars not satisfying these conditions shall be verified by
11 test data. Field samples shall be obtained to ensure that design strengths are
12 developed in accordance with Chapter 3.
13 7. Square reinforcing bars in a building should be classified as either twisted or
14 straight. The developed strength of twisted square bars shall be as specified for
15 deformed bars in this Section, using an effective diameter calculated based on the
16 area of the square bar. Straight square bars shall be considered as plain bars, and
17 the developed strength shall be as specified for plain bars in this Section.
Page 50 of 217
1 C3.5DevelopmentandSplicesofReinforcementDevelopmentrequirementsinaccordancewith
2 Chapter25ofACI318areapplicabletodevelopmentofbarsinallcomponents.Chapter18ofACI
3 318providesdevelopmentrequirementsthatareintendedonlyforuseinyieldingcomponentsof
4 reinforcedconcretemomentframesthatcomplywiththecoverandconfinementprovisionsof
5 Chapter18ofACI318.Chapter25ofACI318permitsreductionsinlengthsifminimumcoverand
6 confinementarepresentinanexistingcomponent.Foradditionalinformationondevelopmentand
7 lapsplices,seeACI408R03,andforhookedanchorage,seeSperryetal.(2005).
8 Eq.(1a),whichisamodifiedversionofthemodelpresentedbyChoandPincheira(2006),reflects
9 theintentofACI318developmentandspliceequationstodevelop1.25timesthenominalbar
10 strength, referred to in this standard as the expected yield strength. The nonlinear relation
11 betweendevelopedstressanddevelopmentlengthreflectstheeffectofincreasingslip,andhence,
12 reducedunitbondstrength,forlongerdevelopmentlengths.RefertoElwoodetal.(2007)for
13 moredetails.
14 Bondstrengthcanbesignificantlycurtailedindamagedregionswithinplastichinges(Sokoliand
15 Ghannoum 2015, Ichinose 1992). The length where bond capacity is curtailed during inelastic
16 deformationsisrecommendedtobe2/3ofthesectioneffectivedepth(d)(SokoliandGhannoum
17 2015).IffsevaluatedusingEq.(1a)equalsfylL/E,thenbondfailureisnotexpectedpriortoinelastic
18 hinging and the bar under consideration can be expected to resist the full yield stress fylL/E.
19 However,fsshouldbereevaluatedusingadegradedeffectiveanchoragelength(lbdeg)usingEq.
20 (1b),whichisreducedbythebarlengthwithintheregionexpectedtobedamaged.Iffsdegremains
21 equaltofylL/Eevenaftertheanchoragelengthisreduced,thennoanchoragefailureisexpected
22 even during inelastic deformations. If, however, fsdeg becomes smaller than fylL/E when the
Page 51 of 217
1 availableanchoragelengthisreduced,thenanchoragefailureisexpected,butonlyafterinelastic
2 deformations occur. In such cases, the limiting stress in longitudinal bars will be fylL/E but the
3 modeling parameters in Tables 8 and 9 for columns with inadequate development or splicing
4 shouldbeused.
5 Forbuildingsconstructedbefore1950,thebondstrengthdevelopedbetweenreinforcingsteel
6 andconcretecanbelessthanpresentdaystrength.Presentequationsfordevelopmentandsplices
7 ofreinforcementaccountformechanicalbondfromdeformationspresentindeformedbarsas
8 wellaschemicalbond.Thelengthrequiredtodevelopplainbarsismuchgreaterthanfordeformed
9 barsandmoresensitivetocrackinginconcrete.Testingandassessmentproceduresfortensilelap
10 splicesanddevelopmentlengthforplainreinforcingsteelarefoundinCRSI(1981).
11
12 3.6Connections to Existing Concrete
13 Connections used to connect two or more components shall be classified according to their
14 anchoring systems as cast-in-place or as post-installed and shall be evaluated and designed
15 according to Chapter 17 of ACI 318 as modified in this section. The properties of the existing
16 anchors and connection systems obtained in accordance with Section 2.2 shall be considered in
17 the evaluation. These provisions do not apply to connections in plastic hinge zones.
18
Page 52 of 217
1 C3.6 Connections to Existing ConcreteChapter 17 of ACI 318 accounts for the influence of
2 crackingontheloadcapacityofconnectors;however,crackingandspallingexpectedinplastic
3 hinge zones is likely to be more severe than the level of damage for which Chapter 17 is
4 applicable. ACI 355.2 and ACI 355.4 describe simulated seismic tests that can be used for
5 qualification of postinstalled anchors. Such tests do not simulate the conditions expected in
6 plastichingezones.
7 ASCE/SEI 4106 Section 6.3.6.1, required the load capacity of anchors placed in areas where
8 crackingisexpectedtobereducedbyafactorof0.5.ThisprovisionwasincludedinFEMA273for
9 bothcastinplaceandpostinstalledanchors,beforetheintroductionofACI31802AppendixD.
10 BecausecrackingisnowaccountedforinACI318,the0.5factorisnotrequiredinSection3.6of
11 thisstandard.
12 Capacities of existing anchors should be evaluated based on the obtained properties in
13 accordancewithSection2.2andChapter17ofACI318.Iftheanchorsarenottestedtofailure
14 buttoaloadbasedontheforcecontrolledactiondeterminedbytheengineerfortheseismic
15 hazard under consideration, the procedure in Chapter 17 of ACI 318 can be used to calculate
16 availablestrengthbasedonthetestresultsandthegeometryofanchorsmeasuredorassumed
17 bytheengineer.
18 To evaluate the capacity of existing castinplace and postinstalled anchors using ACI 318
19 Chapter17,itisnecessarytoknowthegeometryoftheanchor(i.e.,embedment,edgedistance,
20 spacing, and anchor diameter) and material properties. Edge distance, spacing, and anchor
21 diametercanbeestablishedfromconstructiondocumentsorbyvisualinspection.Unlessknown
22 from construction documents, embedment and material properties of the anchor are more
Page 53 of 217
1 difficult to determine. Where failure of the anchor is not critical to meeting the target
2 performancelevel,embedmentofpostinstalledanchorscanbeassumedequaltotheminimum
3 embedmentrequiredbymanufacturersspecificationsfortheanchortypeinquestion.Forcast
4 inplaceanchors,embedmentcanbetakenaslessthanorequaltotheminimumembedment
5 fromtheoriginaldesigncodeforanembeddedboltofthesamediameter.Itisrecommendedthat
6 wheretheconsequenceoffailureofananchoriscriticaltosatisfyingthetargetperformancelevel,
7 anchor embedment not known from construction documents is determined by nondestructive
8 testing(e.g.,ultrasonictesting).
9 Lowerbound properties for steel connector materials and concrete strength based on default
10 values,constructiondocuments,ortestvaluescanbeassumedforanchorstrengthcalculations.
11 Itisnotedthatdirecttestingofanchorscanprovidegreatercertaintyandcanprovidehigher
12 capacities.Judgmentshouldbeexercisedintheuseofdefaultlowerboundmaterialproperties,
13 sincedoingsomaynotyieldaconservativeestimateofanchorcapacityincaseswherethesteel
14 strengthisdeterminedtogoverntheanchorcapacity,andadditionalrequirementsofACI318,
15 Chapter17,forductilebehaviorarewaivedasaresult.
16 Not all manufacturers of postinstalled anchors publish information on the mean and the
17 standard deviation of the ultimate anchor capacity. Older testing for existing postinstalled
18 anchors is often reported at allowable stress design levels and may not comply with the
19 requirementsofChapter17ofACI318forsimulatedseismictests.Itisrecommendedthatcare
20 andjudgmentshouldbeusedindeterminingpulloutstrengthforanchors,particularlythosethat
21 are critical to satisfying the target performance level. Where necessary, in situ strengths of
Page 54 of 217
1 anchorscanbeobtainedorverifiedbystatictestingofrepresentativeanchors.ACI355.2andACI
2 355.4canbeusedforguidanceontesting.
3 Properinstallationofpostinstalledanchorsiscriticaltotheirperformanceandshouldbeverified
4 inallcases.
6 3.6.1 Cast-in-Place Anchors and Connection SystemsAll component actions on cast-in-
7 place anchors and connection systems shall be considered force-controlled. Lower-bound
8 strength of the anchors and connections shall be nominal strength as specified in Chapter 17 of
9 ACI 318 for the connections of structural components. The amplification factor to account for
10 the seismic overstrength, 0, shall be taken equal to unity for the connections of structural
11 components.
12 A strength reduction factor,and amplification factor,0, shall be used for the connections of
13 non-structural components.
14
15 C3.6.1CastinPlaceAnchorsandConnectionSystemsThestrengthreductionfactor,inACI
16 318shallbetakenequaltounityforthelowerboundconnectionstrengthofstructural
17 componentsbuttherequirementsinSection17.2.3ofACI318shallbesatisfiedincludingthe
18 reductionofthestrengthduetocrackedconcreteandcyclicloading.Thecomponentactionson
19 theanchorsandconnectionsystemsforstructuralcomponentsareconsideredasforce
20 controlledactionsaccordingtoSections7.5.2and7.5.3ofASCE41sofurtheramplificationof
21 theseismicdemandisnotnecessary.
Page 55 of 217
1 However,theseismicdemandonnonstructuralcomponentsinChapter13ofASCE41isbased
2 onthatinASCE/SEI7.Astrengthreductionfactor,,andamplificationfactor,0,shouldbe
3 consistentwiththedemand.
5 3.6.2 Post-installed AnchorsAll component actions on post-installed anchor connection systems
6 shall be considered force-controlled. The lower-bound capacity of post-installed anchors shall be
7 nominal strength, as specified in Chapter 17 of ACI 318, or mean less one standard deviation of
8 ultimate values published in approved test reports for the connections of structural components.
9 The amplification factor to account for the seismic overstrength, 0, shall be taken equal to unity
10 for the connections of structural components.
11 A strength reduction factor,and amplification factor, 0, shall be used for the connections of
12 non-structural components.
13
14 C3.6.2PostinstalledAnchorsandConnectionSystemsThestrengthreductionfactor, inACI
15 318 shall be taken equal to unity for the lower bound connection strength of structural
16 components but the requirements in Section 17.2.3 of ACI 318 shall be satisfied including the
17 reductionofthestrengthduetocrackedconcreteandcyclicloading.Thecomponentactionson
18 postinstalled anchors for structural components are considered as forcecontrolled actions
19 accordingtoSections7.5.2and7.5.3ofASCE41sofurtheramplificationoftheseismicdemand
20 isnotnecessary.
21 However,theseismicdemandonnonstructuralcomponentsinChapter13ofASCE41isbased
22 on that in ASCE/SEI 7. Strength reduction factor,and amplification factor, 0, should be
23 consistentwiththedemand.
Page 56 of 217
1
2 3.7Retrofit Measures
3 Seismic retrofit measures for concrete buildings shall meet the requirements of this section and
4 other provisions of this standard.
5 Retrofit measures shall include replacement or retrofit of the component or modification of the
6 structure so that the component is no longer deficient for the selected Performance Objective. If
7 component replacement is selected, the new component shall be designed in accordance with this
8 standard and detailed and constructed in compliance with the applicable building code.
9 Retrofit measures shall be evaluated to ensure that the completed retrofit achieves the selected
10 performance objective. The effects of retrofit on stiffness, strength, and deformability shall be
11 taken into account in an analytical model of the rehabilitated structure. The compatibility of new
12 and existing components shall be checked at displacements consistent with the selected
13 Performance Level.
14 Connections required between existing and new components shall satisfy the requirements of Section
15 3.6 and other requirements of this standard.

16
17 4CONCRETE MOMENT FRAMES

18 4.1Types of Concrete Moment Frames
19 Concrete moment frames are defined as elements composed primarily of horizontal frame
20 components, such as beams, slabs, or both; vertical frame components, such as columns; and joints
21 connecting horizontal and vertical frame components. To resist seismic forces, these elements act
22 alone or in conjunction with shear walls, braced frames, or other elements.
23 Frames that are cast monolithically, including monolithic concrete frames created by the addition
Page 57 of 217
1 of new material, are addressed in this chapter. Frames addressed include reinforced concrete
2 beamcolumn moment frames, post-tensioned concrete beamcolumn moment frames, and slab
3 column moment frames.
4 The frame classifications in Sections 4.1.1 through 4.1.3 include existing construction, new
5 construction, existing construction that has been retrofitted, frames intended as part of
6 the seismic-force-resisting system, and frames not intended as part of the seismic-force-resisting
7 system in the original design.
8 4.1.1 Reinforced Concrete BeamColumn Moment FramesReinforced concrete beamcolumn
9 moment frames, addressed in Section 4.2, are defined by the following conditions:
10 1. Frame components are beams with or without slabs, columns, and their connections;
11 2. Frames are of monolithic construction that provide for moment and shear transfer between
12 beams and columns; and
13 3. Primary reinforcement in components contributing to seismic-force resistance is
14 nonprestressed.
15 4.1.2 Post-tensioned Concrete BeamColumn Moment FramesPost-tensioned concrete beam
16 column moment frames, addressed in Section 4.3, are defined by the following conditions:
17 1. Frame components are beams (with or without slabs), columns, and their connections;
19 beams and columns; and
20 3. Primary reinforcement in beams contributing to seismic-force resistance includes post-
21 tensioned reinforcement with or without non prestressed reinforcement.
22 4.1.3 SlabColumn Moment FramesSlabcolumn moment frames, addressed in Section 2.4, are
23 defined by the following conditions:
Page 58 of 217
1 1. Frame components are slabs with or without beams in the transverse direction, columns,
2 and their connections;
4 slabs and columns; and
5 3. Primary reinforcement in slabs contributing to seismic-force resistance includes
6 nonprestressed reinforcement, prestressed reinforcement, or both.
7
8 4.2Reinforced Concrete BeamColumn Moment Frames

9 4.2.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a beamcolumn frame element shall represent strength,
10 stiffness, and deformation capacity of beams, columns, beamcolumn joints, and other
11 components of the frame, including connections with other elements. Potential failure in flexure,
12 shear, and reinforcement development at any section along the component length shall be
13 considered. Interaction with other elements, including nonstructural components, shall be included.
14 Analytical models representing a beamcolumn frame using line elements with properties
15 concentrated at component centerlines shall be permitted. Where beam and column centerlines do
16 not intersect, the eccentricity effects between frame centerlines shall be considered. Where the
17 centerline of the narrower component falls within the middle third of the adjacent frame component
18 measured transverse to the framing direction, this eccentricity need not be considered. Where
19 larger eccentricities occur, the effect shall be represented either by reductions in effective stiffness,
20 strength, and deformation capacity or by direct modeling of the eccentricity.
21 The beamcolumn joint in monolithic construction is the zone having horizontal dimensions
22 equal to the column cross-sectional dimensions and vertical dimension equal to the beam depth. A
23 wider joint is acceptable where the beam is wider than the column. The beamcolumn joint shall
Page 59 of 217
1 be modeled according to Section 4.2.2 or as justified by experimental evidence. The model of the
2 connection between columns and foundation shall be selected based on details of the column
3 foundation connection and rigidity of the foundationsoil system.
4 Action of the slab as a diaphragm interconnecting vertical components shall be considered.
5 Action of the slab as a composite beam flange shall be considered in developing stiffness, strength,
6 and deformation capacities of the beam component model per Section 3.1.3.
7 Inelastic action shall be restricted to those components and actions listed in Tables 7, 8, and 9,
8 except where it is demonstrated by experimental evidence and analysis that other inelastic action
9 is acceptable for the selected performance level. Acceptance criteria are specified in Section 4.2.4.
10
11 C4.2.1 GeneralNonstructural components should be included in the analytical model if such
12 elements contribute significantly to building stiffness, modify dynamic properties, or have
13 significant impact on the behaviorof adjacentstructural elements. Section 7.2.3.3 of ASCE 41
14 suggeststhatnonstructuralcomponentsshouldbeincludediftheirlateralstiffnessexceeds10%
15 ofthetotalinitiallateralstiffnessofastory.Partialinfillwallsandstaircasesareexamplesof
16 nonstructuralelementsthatcanalterthebehaviorofadjacentconcretestructuralelements.
17
18 4.2.2 Stiffness of Reinforced Concrete BeamColumn Moment Frames

19 4.2.2.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresBeams shall be modeled considering flexural
20 and shear stiffnesses, including the effect of the slab acting as a flange in monolithic construction
21 according to the provisions in Section 3.1.3. Columns shall be modeled considering flexural, shear,
22 and axial stiffnesses. Refer to Section 3.1.2 to compute the effective stiffnesses. Where joint
23 stiffness is not modeled explicitly, it shall be permitted to be modeled implicitly by adjusting a
Page 60 of 217
1 centerline model (Fig. 2):
2 1. For MColE/MnBE > 1.2, column offsets are rigid and beam offsets are not;
3 2. For MColE/MBE < 0.8, beam offsets are rigid and column offsets are not; and
4 3. For 0.8 MColE/MBE 1.2, half of the beam and column offsets are considered rigid.
5 MColE shall be calculated considering axial force from the gravity loads specified in Equation 7-
6 3 of ASCE 41. Because this modeling approach accounts only for joint shear flexibility, stiffness
7 values used for the beams and columns shall include the flexibility resulting from bar slip.
8
9 C4.2.2.1 LinearStaticandDynamicProceduresVariousapproachestoexplicitlymodelbeam
10 columnjointsareavailableintheliterature(ElMetwallyandChen1988;GhobarahandBiddah
11 1999;ShinandLaFave2004;MitraandLowes2007,LinandRestrepo,2002).Forsimplicityof
12 implementation in commercial structural analysis software and agreement with calibration
13 studiesperformedinthedevelopmentofthisstandard,thissectiondefinesanimplicitbeam
14 column joint modeling technique using centerline models with semirigid joint offsets. Fig. 2
15 showsanexampleofanexplicitjointmodelandillustratestheimplicitjointmodelingapproach.
16 Intheimplicitjointmodel,onlyaportionofthebeamandcolumn,orboth,withinthegeometric
17 jointregionisdefinedasrigid.Intypicalcommercialsoftwarepackages,thisportioncanrange
18 from0,inwhichcasethemodelisatruecenterlinemodel,to1.0,wheretheentirejointregion
19 isrigid.FurthercommentaryisprovidedinSectionC5.1.2.1,andbackgroundmaterialisprovided
20 inElwoodetal.(2007)andBirelyetal.(2009).
21
22 4.2.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations shall comply with
Page 61 of 217
1 Section 3.1.2. Nonlinear modeling parameters for beams, columns, and beamcolumn joints are
2 provided in Tables 7, 8, 9, and 10, respectively.
3 Beams and columns shall be modeled using concentrated or distributed plastic hinge models.
4 Other models whose behavior represents the behavior of reinforced concrete beam and column
5 components subjected to seismic loading shall be permitted. The beam and column model shall be
6 capable of representing inelastic response along the component length, except where it is shown
7 by equilibrium that yielding is restricted to the component ends. Where nonlinear response is
8 expected in a mode other than flexure, the model shall be established to represent such effects.
9 Monotonic load-deformation relations shall be established according to the generalized load-
10 deformation relation shown in Fig. 1, with the exception that different relations shall be permitted
11 where verified by experiments. The overall load-deformation relation shall be established so that
12 maximum resistance is consistent with the strength specifications of Sections 3.2 and 4.2.3.
13 For beams and columns, the generalized deformation in Fig. 1 is plastic hinge rotation. For
14 beamcolumn joints, the generalized deformation is shear strain. Values of the generalized
15 deformation at points B, C, and D shall be derived from experiments or rational analyses and shall
16 take into account the interactions among flexure, axial load, and shear.
17
18 C4.2.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureThe modeling parameters and acceptance criteria
19 specifiedinTables8and9reflectresultsfromresearchonreinforcedconcretecolumnsandan
20 updateddatabaseofcolumnsteststhatincludes319rectangularand171circularcolumntests
21 without lapsplices (Ghannoum and Sivaramakrishnan 2012 a,b), and a database of 39
22 rectangular columns containing lapsplices (Al Awaar 2015). Most circular columns in the
23 database contained spiral reinforcement. Separate tables are given for rectangular columns
Page 62 of 217
1 (Table8)andspirallyreinforcedcircularcolumns(Table9).Forcircularcolumnsreinforcedwith
2 ties not conforming to ACI 318 seismic hoop designation, Table 8 should be used. The three
3 parametersthatareusedinTables8and9tocalculatemodelingparametersandacceptance
4 criteriaforcolumnsnotcontrolledbyinadequatedevelopmentorsplicingare:axialloadratio,
5 transversereinforcementratio,andratioofsheardemandatflexuralyieldingtoshearcapacity
6 (VyE/VCol0E).Forcolumnscontrolledbyinadequatedevelopmentorsplicing,thesamemodeling
7 parameters were introduced for rectangular and circular columns in Tables 8 and 9 and are
8 related to: axial load ratio, transverse reinforcement ratio, and the ratio of transverse
9 reinforcementtolongitudinalreinforcementstrength.
10 ThemodelingparametersinTables8and9definetheplasticrotationsaccordingtoFig.1a.As
11 showninFig.1a,modelingparameteranlprovidestheplasticrotationatsignificantlossoflateral
12 forcecapacity.Forthepurposesofdetermininganlvaluesbasedontestdata,itwasassumed
13 thatthispointrepresenteda20%orgreaterreductioninthelateralforceresistancefromthe
14 measuredpeakshearcapacity.Forcolumnsexpectedtoexperienceflexuralfailures(VyE/VCol0E
15 0.6),suchlossoflateralloadresistancecanbecausedbyconcretecrushing,barbuckling,and
16 otherflexuraldamagemechanisms.Forcolumnsexpectedtoexperienceshearfailures,either
17 before or after flexural yielding (VyE/ VCol0E > 0.6), loss of lateral load resistance is commonly
18 caused by severe diagonal cracking indicative of shear damage. For columns with inadequate
19 anchorage or splicing, loss of lateral load resistance is caused by bond splitting failures that
20 gradually unload the longitudinal bars. Consistent with Section 7.5.1.2 of ASCE 41, modeling
21 parameterbnlprovidesanestimateoftheplasticrotationatthelossofgravityloadsupport,that
22 is,axialloadfailure.
Page 63 of 217
1 Modeling parameters given in Tables 8 and 9 represent median estimates of parameters
2 extracted from columns in the database (Ghannoum and Sivaramakrishnan 2012 a,b). For
3 columnswithlongitudinalbarsthatareadequatelyanchoredorspliced,equationsformodeling
4 parameteranlwereobtainedfromaweightedregressionanalysisofthedata(Ghannoumand
5 Matamoros2014).Anupperboundonthetransversereinforcementratio(t)of0.0175was
6 selectedbecausefewcolumnsinthedatabasecontainedaratioexceedingthatlimit,aswellas
7 tolimitthemaximumdeformationcapacityofhighlyconfinedcolumns.Equationsformodeling
8 parameterscannotbeusedforcolumnswithatransversereinforcementratiobelow0.0005as
9 theyarenotintendedforunreinforcedcolumns.Forcolumnswithtiesnotadequatelyanchored
10 intothecore,anupperboundonthetransversereinforcementratioof0.0075wasselectedto
11 limittheircontributiontodeformationcapacity.AlowerlimitonVyE/VCol0Eof0.2isprescribed
12 becausefewcolumnsinthedatabasehavelowervaluesofVyE/VCol0E.
13 Duetothescarcityofcollapsetests,equationsformodelingparameterbnlwereobtainedfrom
14 abehavioralmodeladaptedfromElwoodandMoehle(2005)(GhannoumandMatamoros2014).
15 Recent test data from columns tested to axial failure (Matamoros et al. 2008; Woods and
16 Matamoros2010;Henkhaus2010;andSimpsonandMatamoros2012)showthatthedriftratio
17 at axial failure for columns with various configurations and loading histories is estimated
18 adequatelyusingthefailuremodelproposedbyElwoodandMoehle(2005).Thesetofcolumns
19 evaluated included slender and short columns, as well as shearcritical columns and columns
20 failing in shear after flexural yielding. Table C1 presents the practical range of modeling
21 parametersforconcretecolumnsevaluatedusingtheequationsinTables8and9.
22 The tabulated relations for modeling parameters were evaluated using the data from
Page 64 of 217
1 laboratory tests (Ghannoum and Matamoros 2014). The An error ratio was is defined as the
2 modelingparametersevaluatedfromtablesdividedbytheexperimentalmodelingparameter
3 values for the column tests. The error ratios were found to follow lognormal probability
4 distributionsforallmodelingparameters(GhannoumandMatamoros2014).Fittedlognormal
5 distributionswereusedtoproducemultipliersforthetabulatedmodelingparameterrelations
6 toachievespecificprobabilitiesofexceedance(TableC2).
7 Acceptancecriteria in Tables 8 and 9 were selectedas 15% of the anl values for Immediate
8 Occupancy,50%ofthebnlvaluesforLifeSafety,and70%ofthebnlvaluesforCollapsePrevention.
9 ThefractionsofbnlvalueswereselectedbasedonTableC2toachievelowprobabilitiesofaxial
10 failureforcolumnssatisfyingtheacceptancecriteria.Theseprobabilitieswere10%and25%for
11 LifeSafetyandCollapsePrevention,respectively.
12 NotethattheprobabilitiesofexceedanceinTableC1correspondtotheprobabilityoffailure
13 foracolumngivenaplasticrotationdemandequaltothe modelingparameterscaledbythe
14 appropriatemultiplierinTableC2.
15 Mostlaboratorytestsignoresomefactorsthatcaninfluencethedriftcapacity,suchasloading
16 historyandbidirectionalloading.TheprobabilitiesofexceedanceinTableC2canthereforebe
17 largerifthesefactorsareconsidered.Databasesusedtoassessthemodelconservatismconsist
18 ofrectangularandcircularcolumnssubjectedtounidirectionallateralforcesappliedparallelto
19 eitheroneofthecolumnprincipalaxes.Actualcolumnshaveconfigurationsandloadingsthat
20 differfromthoseusedinthedatabases.Notethatbidirectionalloadingoncornercolumnsand
21 longdurationseismicmotionsisexpectedtoresultinlowerdeformationcapacities(Matamoros
22 etal.2008;Henkhaus2010,WoodsandMatamoros2010;SimpsonandMatamoros2012;and
Page 65 of 217
1 Ghannoum and Matamoros 2014). Test data has shown that the drift ratio at axial failure of
2 columnssubjectedtobiaxialloadingand/oralargenumberofcyclesperdriftratiocanbelower
3 thanthatofcolumnwithloadinghistoriesconsistingofuniaxialloadingwiththreecyclesperdrift
4 ratio.Limiteddataexist,however,toassessthedegreeofreductionanticipated.
5 The acceptance criteria for linear procedures in Table 10 were determined based on the
6 modeling parameters for nonlinear procedures in Tables 8 and 9 in accordance with ASCE 41
7 Section7.6.
8 The licensed design professional is referred to the following reports for further guidance
9 regardingdeterminationofmodelingparametersandacceptancecriteriaforreinforcedconcrete
10 columns:Lynnetal.1996;PanagiotakosandFardis2001;Sezen2002;FardisandBiskinis2003;
11 Biskinis et al. 2004; Elwood and Moehle 2004, 2005a, and 2005b; Berry and Eberhard 2005;
12 Henkhaus, 2010; Matamoros et al. 2008; Woods and Matamoros 2010; and Ghannoum and
13 Matamoros2014.
14
15 4.2.2.3 Nonlinear Dynamic ProcedureFor NDP, the complete hysteretic behavior of each
16 component shall be modeled using properties verified by experimental evidence. The use of the
17 generalized load-deformation relation described by Fig. 1 to represent the envelope relation for the
18 analysis shall be permitted. Refer to Section 4.2.2.2 for the application of parameters for columns
19 in Tables 8 and 9. Unloading and reloading properties shall represent significant stiffness and
20 strength-degradation characteristics.
21
22 4.2.3 Strength of Reinforced Concrete BeamColumn Moment FramesComponent strengths
Page 66 of 217
1 shall be computed according to the general requirements of Section 3.2, as modified in this section.
2 The maximum component strength shall be determined considering potential failure in flexure,
3 axial load, shear, torsion, bar development, and other actions at all points along the length of the
4 component, under the actions of design gravity load and seismic force combinations.
5
6 4.2.3.1 ColumnsFor columns, the shear strength Vcol shall be permitted to be calculated using
7 Eq. (3).
8
9 (3)
10
11 /

/
12 1 0.8 . (3)
/
13 /

. /
14 1 0.8
. /
15
16
17 in which knl = 1.0 in regions where displacement ductility demand is less than or equal to 2, 0.7 in
18 regions where displacement ductility demand is greater than or equal to 6, and varies linearly for
Page 67 of 217
1 displacement ductility between 2 and 6;
2
0.75 for lightweight aggregate concrete and 1.0 for normal-weight aggregate concrete;
3 NUG is the axial compression force calculated using Eq. 7-3 of ASCE 41 (set to zero for tension
4 force);
5 MUD/VUDd is the largest ratio of moment to shear times effective depth for the column under design
6 loadings evaluated using Eq. (7-34) of ASCE 41, but shall not be taken greater than 4 or less
7 than 2; and
8 Col = 1.0 for s/d 0.75, 0.0 for s/d 1.0, and varies linearly for s/d between 0.75 and 1.0.
9 Alternative formulations for column strength that consider effects of reversed cyclic inelastic
10 deformations and that are verified by experimental evidence shall be permitted.
11 For columns satisfying the detailing and proportioning requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 18,
12 and for which shear is classified as a deformation-controlled action, as well as for columns in
13 which shear is classified as a force-controlled action, it shall be permitted to use the shear strength
14 equations in Chapter 18 of ACI 318.
15
16 C4.2.3.1 ColumnsTheuseofshearstrengthequationsandmaterialpropertiestocalculatethe
17 shearstrengthVCol0EinthisstandardisillustratedinFigureC1.
18 As discussed in Section C5.3, experimental evidence indicates the possibility that flexural
19 deformabilitycanbereducedascoexistingshearforcesincrease.Asflexuralductilitydemands
20 increase,shearcapacitydecreases,whichcanresultinashearfailurebeforetheoreticalflexural
21 deformation capacities are reached. Caution should be exercised when flexural deformation
22 capacitiesaredeterminedbycalculation.
23 Eq. (3) illustrates the reduction in column shear capacity with increasing nonlinear
Page 68 of 217
1 deformationsandprovidesanestimateofthemeanobservedshearstrengthfor51rectangular
2 reinforcedconcretecolumnssubjectedtounidirectionallateralforcesparalleltoonefaceofthe
3 column (Sezen and Moehle 2004). The coefficient of variation for the ratio of measured to
4 calculatedshearstrengthis0.15.
5 For a column experiencing flexural yielding before shear failure (VyE < VCol0E), displacement
6 ductilitydemandisdefinedastheratioofmaximumdisplacementdemandtoyielddisplacement.
7 Theyielddisplacementisthelateraldisplacementofthecolumn,determinedusingtheeffective
8 rigiditiesfromTable5,atasheardemandresultinginflexuralyieldingoftheplastichinges,VyE.
9 Themaximumdisplacementdemandforthecolumncanbeestimatedasthemaximuminterstory
10 displacement demand. Alternatively, the interstory displacement demand can be refined by
11 accountingfortheinterstorydisplacementscausedbyrigidbodyrotationsatthebaseandtop
12 of the column. Further discussion on displacement ductility demand is found in Sezen and
13 Moehle (2004). Eq. (3) should not be used to determine displacement ductility (Elwood and
14 Moehle2005a).
15 ThelicenseddesignprofessionalisreferredtotheproceedingsoftheseminarNewInformation
16 onSeismicPerformanceofConcreteBuildings(PEER/EERI)(2006)foracomparisonoftestdata
17 withseveralcolumnshearstrengthequations.
18
19 4.2.3.2 BeamColumn JointsFor beamcolumn joints, the nominal cross-sectional area Aj shall
20 be defined by a joint depth equal to the column dimension in the direction of framing and a joint
21 width equal to the smallest of the following:
22 1. The column width;
Page 69 of 217
1 2. The beam width plus the joint depth; and
2 3. Twice the smaller perpendicular distance from the longitudinal axis of the beam to the
3 column side.
4 Design forces shall be calculated based on development of flexural plastic hinges in adjacent
5 frame members, including effective slab width, but need not exceed values calculated from design
6 gravity and earthquake-load combinations. Joint shear strength VJ shall be calculated using the
7 general procedures of ACI 318, as modified by Eq. (4):
8 (lb/in.2 units) (4)

/
9 0.083 (MPa units)

/
10 Where 0.75 for lightweight aggregate concrete and 1.0 for normal-weight aggregate
11 concrete;
12 Aj is the effective horizontal joint area with dimensions as defined above; and
13 is defined in Table 12.
14
15 4.2.4 Acceptance Criteria for Reinforced Concrete BeamColumn Moment Frames

16 4.2.4.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresAll actions shall be classified as being either
17 deformation controlled or force controlled, as defined in Section 3.2.1.
18 Design actions on components shall be determined based on Chapter 7 of ASCE 41. Where the
19 calculated demand-to-capacity ratio values exceed unity, the following design actions shall be
20 determined using the limit analysis principles in Chapter 7 of ASCE 41:
21 1. Moments, shears, torsions, and development and splice actions corresponding to
22 development of component strength in beams and columns;
Page 70 of 217
1 2. Joint shears corresponding to strength development in adjacent beams and columns; and
2 3. Axial load in columns and joints, considering likely plastic action in components above the
3 story in which the columns or joints are located.
4 Design actions shall be compared with strengths in accordance with Section 5.5.2.2 of ASCE 41,
5 with the m-factors selected from Tables 10, 13, and 14 for columns, beams, and beamcolumn
6 joints, respectively. Components satisfying Eq. (7-36) or (7-37) of ASCE 41, as applicable, shall
7 comply with the performance criteria.
8 Where the average demand-to-capacity ratio for columns at a story exceeds the average value
9 for beams at the same level and exceeds the greater of 1.0 and m/2 for all columns at all levels, the
10 level shall be defined as a weak story element. For weak story elements, one of the following shall
11 be satisfied:
12 1. The check of average demand-to-capacity ratio values at the level shall be repeated,
13 considering all primary and secondary components at the level with a weak story element at
14 the level. If the average demand-to-capacity ratio values for vertical components exceeds the
15 average value for horizontal components at the level and exceeds 2.0, the structure shall be
16 reanalyzed using
17 a nonlinear procedure or retrofitted to eliminate this deficiency;
18 2. The structure shall be reanalyzed using either the NSP or the NDP of Chapter 7 of ASCE
19 41; or
20 3. The structure shall be retrofitted to eliminate the weak story element condition.
21 4.2.4.2 Nonlinear Static and Dynamic ProceduresCalculated component actions shall satisfy
22 the requirements of Section 7.4.3.2 of ASCE 41. Where the generalized deformation is taken as
23 rotation in the flexural plastic hinge zone in beams and columns, the plastic hinge rotation
Page 71 of 217
1 capacities shall be defined by Tables 7, 8, and 9. Where the generalized deformation is shear
2 distortion of the beamcolumn joint, shear angle capacities are defined by Table 11. Where
3 inelastic action is indicated for a component or action not listed in Tables 7, 8, 9, and 11, the
4 performance shall be deemed unacceptable. Alternative approaches or values shall be permitted
5 where justified by experimental evidence and analysis.
6
7 C4.2.4.2 NonlinearStaticandDynamicProceduresRefertoSectionsC4.2.2.2andC4.2.3.1for
8 discussionofTables8and9,andacceptancecriteriaforreinforcedconcretecolumns.
10 4.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Reinforced Concrete BeamColumn Moment FramesSeismic

11 retrofit measures for reinforced concrete beamcolumn moment frames shall meet the
12 requirements of Section 3.7 and other provisions of this standard and ASCE 41.
13
14 C4.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Reinforced Concrete BeamColumn Moment FramesChapter 12

15 of FEMA 547 (2007) provides detailed descriptions of effective retrofit measures for use with
16 concrete moment frames, including considerations such as constructability, disruption for building
17 occupants, and costs.
18 Retrofit measures that can be effective in rehabilitating reinforced concrete beamcolumn
19 moment frames are the following:
20 1. Jacketing existing beams, columns, or joints with new reinforced concrete, steel, or fiber-
21 reinforced polymer wrap overlays. Where reinforced concrete jackets are used, the design
22 should provide detailing to enhance ductility. Component strength should not exceed any
23 limiting strength of connections with adjacent components. Jackets should be designed to
Page 72 of 217
1 provide increased connection strength and improved continuity between adjacent components
2 (FEMA 547 Sections 12.4.4, 12.4.5, and 12.4.6);
3 2. Post-tensioning existing beams, columns, or joints using external post-tensioning
4 reinforcement. Post-tensioned reinforcement should be unbonded within a distance equal to
5 twice the effective depth from sections where inelastic action is expected. Anchorages should
6 be located away from regions where inelastic action is anticipated and should be designed
7 with consideration of possible force variations from seismic forces;
8 3. Modifying the element by selective material removal from the existing element. Examples
9 include (a) where nonstructural components interact with the frame, eliminating this
10 interference by removing or separating the nonstructural component from the frame; (b)
11 weakening from concrete removal or severing longitudinal reinforcement to change the
12 response from a nonductile to a more ductile mode, for example, weakening beams to promote
13 formation of a strong-column, weak-beam system; and (c) segmenting walls to change
14 stiffness and strength;
15 4. Improving deficient existing reinforcement details. Removal of cover concrete to modify
16 existing reinforcement details should avoid damage to core concrete and the bond between
17 existing reinforcement and core concrete. New cover concrete should be designed and
18 constructed to achieve fully composite action with the existing materials (FEMA 547 Sections
19 12.4.4, 12.4.5, and 12.4.6);
20 5. Changing the building system to reduce demands on the existing elements. Examples
21 include addition of supplementary seismic-force-resisting elements, such as walls or
22 buttresses, seismic isolation, and mass reduction (FEMA 547 Chapter 24); and
23 6. Changing the frame element to a shear wall, infilled frame, or braced frame element by
Page 73 of 217
1 adding new material. Connections between new and existing materials should be designed to
2 transfer the anticipated forces based on the design-load combinations. Where the existing
3 concrete frame columns and beams act as boundary components and collectors for the new
4 shear wall or braced frame, these should be checked for adequacy, considering strength,
5 reinforcement development, and deformability. Diaphragms, including ties and collectors,
6 should be evaluated and if necessary, rehabilitated to ensure a complete load path to the new
7 shear wall or braced frame element (FEMA 547 Sections 12.4.1 and 12.4.2).
8
9 4.3Post-tensioned Concrete BeamColumn Moment Frames

10 4.3.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a post-tensioned concrete beamcolumn frame element
11 shall be established
12 as specified in Section 4.2.1 for reinforced concrete beamcolumn moment frames. In addition to
13 potential failure modes described in Section 4.2.1, the analysis model shall consider potential
14 failure of tendon anchorages.
15 The analysis procedures described in Chapter 7 of ASCE 41 apply to frames with post-tensioned
16 beams satisfying the following conditions:
17 1. The average prestress fpc calculated for an area equal to the product of the shortest and the
18 perpendicular cross-sectional dimensions of the beam does not exceed the greater of 750 lb/in.2
19 (5 MPa) or fcL/12 at locations of nonlinear action;
20 2. Prestressing tendons do not provide more than one-quarter of the strength at the joint face
21 for both positive and negative moments; and
22 3. Anchorages for tendons are demonstrated to have performed satisfactorily for seismic
23 forces in compliance with ACI 318 requirements. These anchorages shall occur outside
Page 74 of 217
1 hinging areas or joints, except in existing components where experimental evidence
2 demonstrates that the connection meets the Performance Objectives under design loadings.
3 Alternative procedures shall be used where these conditions are not satisfied.
4 4.3.2 Stiffness of Post-tensioned Concrete BeamColumn Moment Frames
5 4.3.2.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresBeams shall be modeled considering flexural
6 and shear stiffnesses, including the effect of the slab acting as a flange in monolithic and composite
7 construction. Columns shall be modeled considering flexural, shear, and axial stiffnesses. Refer to
8 Section 3.1.2 for effective stiffness computations. Refer to Section 4.2.2.1 for modeling of joint
9 stiffness.
10 4.3.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations shall comply with
11 Section 5.1.2 and reinforced concrete frame requirements of Section 4.2.2.2.
12 Values of the generalized deformation at points B, C, and D in Fig. 1 shall be derived either from
13 experiments or from approved rational analyses, considering the interactions among flexure, axial
14 load, and shear. Alternatively, where the generalized deformation is taken as rotation in the flexural
15 plastic hinge zone and the three conditions of Section 4.3.1 are satisfied, beam plastic hinge
16 rotation capacities shall be permitted to be as defined in Table 7. Columns and joints shall be
17 modeled as described in Section 4.2.2.
18 4.3.2.3 Nonlinear Dynamic ProcedureFor the NDP, the complete hysteretic behavior of each
19 component shall be modeled using properties verified by experimental evidence. Fig. 1 shall be
20 taken to represent the envelope relation for the analysis. Unloading and reloading properties shall
21 represent significant stiffness and strength degradation characteristics as influenced by
22 prestressing.
23 4.3.3 Strength of Post-tensioned Concrete BeamColumn Moment FramesComponent
Page 75 of 217
1 strengths shall be computed according to the general requirements of Section 3.2 and additional
2 requirements of Section 4.2.3. Effects of prestressing on strength shall be considered.
3 For deformation-controlled actions, prestress shall be assumed effective to determine the
4 maximum actions that can be developed in association with nonlinear response of the frame. For
5 force-controlled actions, the effects on strength of prestress loss shall be considered as a design
6 condition, where such losses are possible under design-load combinations including inelastic
7 deformation reversals.
8 4.3.4 Acceptance Criteria for Post-tensioned Concrete BeamColumn Moment Frames
9 Acceptance criteria for post-tensioned concrete beamcolumn moment frames shall follow the
10 criteria for reinforced concrete beamcolumn frames specified in Section 4.2.4.
11 Modeling parameters and acceptance criteria shall be based on Tables 7 through 10, 13, and 14.
12 4.3.5 Retrofit Measures for Post-tensioned Concrete BeamColumn Moment FramesSeismic
13 retrofit measures for post-tensioned concrete beamcolumn moment frames shall meet the
14 requirements of Section 3.7 and other provisions of this standard and ASCE 41.
15
16 C4.3.5 RetrofitMeasuresforPosttensionedConcreteBeamColumnMomentFramesRetrofit
17 measuresdescribedinSectionC4.2.5forreinforcedconcretebeamcolumnmomentframescan
18 beeffectiveinretrofitofposttensionedconcretebeamcolumnmomentframes.Furtherretrofit
19 measurescanbefoundinFEMA547(2007).
20
21 4.4SlabColumn Moment Frames

22 4.4.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a slabcolumn frame element shall represent strength,
23 stiffness, and deformation capacity of slabs, columns, slabcolumn connections, and other
Page 76 of 217
1 components of the frame. The connection between the columns and foundation shall be modeled
2 based on the details of the columnfoundation connection and rigidity of the foundationsoil
3 system. Potential failure in flexure, shear, shear-moment transfer (punching shear), and
4 reinforcement development at any section along the component length shall be considered. The
5 effects of changes in cross section, slab openings, and interaction with structural and nonstructural
6 components shall be considered.
7 An analytical model of the slabcolumn frame based on any of the following approaches shall
8 be permitted to be used:
9 1. Effective beam width model: Columns and slabs are represented by line elements rigidly
10 interconnected at the slabcolumn connection, where the slab width included in the model is
11 adjusted to account for flexibility of the slabcolumn connection;
12 2. Equivalent frame model: Columns and slabs are represented by line elements, and stiffness
13 of column or slab elements is adjusted to account for flexibility of the slabcolumn connection;
14 and
15 3. Finite element model: Columns are represented by line elements and the slab by plate-
16 bending elements.
17
18 C4.4.1 GeneralThestiffnessofaslabcolumnframeishighlydependentontheratioofthe
19 columncrosssectiondimensions(c1andc2)totheslabplandimensions(l1andl2).
20 Approachesformodelingslabcolumnframesystemsdifferprimarilyinhowslabstiffnessis
21 incorporatedintheanalyticalmodel.
22 1. Effectivebeamwidthmodel:Slabelementwidthisreducedtoadjusttheelasticstiffness
23 tomorecloselymatchmeasuredvalues(Pecknold1975).Columnbehaviorandslabcolumn
Page 77 of 217
1 momentandsheartransferaremodeledseparately;
2 2. Equivalentframemodel:Shearandflexureintheslabbeyondthewidthofthecolumnare
3 assumedtobetransferredtothecolumnthroughtorsionalelementsperpendiculartothe
4 slabspandirection(VanderbiltandCorley1983).Flexibilityofthetorsionalelementsreduces
5 theelasticstiffnessoftheoverallframe.Althoughitispossibletomodelthemseparately,
6 torsionalelementsaretypicallylumpedwithcolumnsortheslabtoproduceaframewith
7 equivalentstiffness(Chapter8ofACI318);and
8 3. Finiteelementmodel:Theslabdistortionismodeledexplicitlyusingfiniteelements.
9 Each approach is considered acceptable for analytical modeling of slabcolumn frames.
10 Research has shown that the effective beam approach tends to overestimate lateral stiffness,
11 whereastheequivalentframeapproachtendstounderestimatelateralstiffnessofslabcolumn
12 systems responding in the elastic range (Hwang and Moehle 2000). For either approach, the
13 elastic stiffness should be reduced further to account for cracking in slabcolumn systems
14 respondingintheinelasticrange(Luoetal.1994,HwangandMoehle2000,andDovichandWight
15 2005).
16
17 4.4.2 Stiffness of SlabColumn Moment Frames

18 4.4.2.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresSlabs shall be modeled considering flexural,
19 shear, and torsional (in the slab adjacent to the column) stiffnesses. Columns shall be modeled
20 considering flexural, shear, and axial stiffnesses. Slabcolumn connections shall be modeled as
21 stiff or rigid components. Although effective component stiffnesses shall be determined according
22 to the general principles of Section 3.1.2, adjustments shall be permitted based on experimental
Page 78 of 217
1 evidence.
2
3 C4.4.2.1 LinearStaticandDynamicProcedures
4 1.Effective beam width model: Allen and Darvall (1977) provide tables of effective width
5 coefficientsfordifferentcombinationsofplateaspectratios(l1/l2)andcolumnwidthtoslab
6 spanratios(c1/l1orc2/l1).Researchindicatesthattheeffectivewidthofexteriorbaysshould
7 belessthantheeffectivewidthofinteriorbaysbecauseofthehigherflexibilityofonesided
8 slabcolumnconnectionsattheframeend.HwangandMoehle(2000)provideequationsfor
9 effectivewidththatshowtherelationshipbetweenexteriorandinteriorbaysisabout1/2.
10 Eq.(C2)canbeusedinsteadoftablesfromAllenandDarvall(1977).
11 Forinteriorbays: beff 2c1 l1 / 3 (C2a)
12 Forexteriorbays: beff c1 l1 / 6 (C2b)
13 wherebeffistheeffectiveslabwidth.
14 Toaccountforcrackingfromtemperature,shrinkage,ornonlinearresponse,slabstiffness
15 determinedusinggrosssectionpropertiesbasedontheaboveguidanceshouldbereduced
16 by an effective stiffness factor eff . There is general agreement that eff 1/ 3 is
17 appropriatefornonprestressedslabs(VanderbiltandCorley1983).Somewhathigher,yet
18 conservative,valuescanbeobtainedusingEq.(C3)fromHwangandMoehle(2000):
19 eff 4c1 / l1 1/ 3 (C3)
20 Forprestressedposttensionedslabs,itisgenerallyagreedthathighervaluesof eff are
Page 79 of 217
1 appropriate ( eff 1/ 2 ) because of reduced cracking caused by prestressing (Kang and
2 Wallace2005).
3 2.Equivalentframemodel:Column,slabbeam,andtorsionalconnectionelementproperties
4 fortheequivalentframemodelaredefinedinChapter8ofACI318.Toaccountforcracking
5 caused by temperature, shrinkage, or nonlinear response, the stiffness of the torsional
6 connection element based on gross section properties defined in ACI 318 should be
7 multipliedbyafactorof1/3.
9 4.4.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations shall comply with the
10 requirements of Section 3.1.2. Nonlinear modeling parameters for slabcolumn connections are
11 provided in Table 15.
12 Nonlinear static models shall be capable of representing inelastic response along the component
13 length, except where it is shown by equilibrium that yielding is restricted to the component ends.
14 Idealized load-deformation relations shall be modeled using the generalized relation shown in
15 Fig. 1. The overall load-deformation relation shall be established so that the maximum resistance
16 is consistent with the strength specifications of Sections 3.2 and 4.4.3. For columns, the
17 generalized deformation shown in Fig. 1 is flexural plastic hinge rotation with parameters as
18 defined in Table 8 and Table 9. For slabs and slabcolumn connections, the generalized
19 deformation shown in Fig. 1 is plastic rotation with parameters as defined in Table 15. Different
20 relations shall be permitted where verified by experimentally obtained cyclic response relations of
21 slabcolumn subassemblies.
22
Page 80 of 217
1 C4.4.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureThe values provided in Table 15 are used to assess
2 punchingfailuresatslabcolumnconnections.Elwoodetal.(2007)provideacomparisonofthe
3 modelingparametersinTable15andtestdatasummarizedbyKangandWallace(2006).Lateral
4 driftratioistypicallyreportedfortestdata;therefore,plasticrotationswerederivedfromthetest
5 dataassumingcolumndeformationswerenegligibleandyieldrotationsof0.01and0.015radians
6 forreinforcedconcreteandposttensionedslabs,respectively.Thelargerrotationvalueforpost
7 tensionedconnectionsreflectsthelargerspantoslabthicknessratioscommonforthistypeof
8 construction.ContinuityreinforcementforreinforcedconcreteconnectionsisbasedonJointACI
9 ASCECommittee352recommendations(ACI352R).
10 Plasticrotationvaluesareapproximatelymeanandmeanminusonestandarddeviationvalues
11 for connections with and without continuity reinforcement, respectively. Mean minus one
12 standard deviation values give total (yield plus plastic) rotation values that are close to the
13 maximum drift values allowed by ACI 318 Section 18.14.5.1, without the use of slab shear
14 reinforcement. Few data exist for reinforced concrete connections subjected to gravity shear
15 ratiosgreaterthan0.6andforposttensionedconnectionssubjectedtoreversecyclicloading.The
16 residual strength capacity for posttensioned connections is based on test results reported by
17 Qaisrani (1993). Although relatively few tests have been reported for edge connections, the
18 limiteddataavailablesuggestthattherelationshipbetweenrotationandgravityshearratiofor
19 exteriorconnectionsissimilartothetrendforinteriorconnections.
20 Modeling of slabcolumn connections is commonly accomplished using beam elements to
21 representtheslabandarigidplastictorsionalmembertorepresentmomentandsheartransfer
22 attheconnectionbetweenslabandcolumn(Fig.C2)(Elwoodetal.2007).Ifthepunchingcapacity
Page 81 of 217
1 oftheslabcolumnconnectionisinsufficienttodevelopthenominalcapacityforthedeveloped
2 slabflexuralreinforcementprovidedwithinthecolumnstrip,thenallyieldingisassumedtooccur
3 in the torsional element using the modeling parameters provided in Table 15. For strong
4 connections where yielding of slab reinforcement within the column strip is expected, plastic
5 rotationsshouldbemodeledonlywithinthebeamelementsframingintothetorsionalelement
6 usingtheplasticrotationmodelingparametersprovidedinTable15todefinetheplastichinges
7 atthebeamends.
9 4.4.2.3 Nonlinear Dynamic ProcedureThe requirements of Sections 3.2 and 4.2.2.3 for
10 reinforced concrete beamcolumn moment frames shall apply to slabcolumn moment frames.
11 4.4.3 Strength of SlabColumn Moment FramesComponent strengths shall be computed
12 according to the general requirements of Section 4.2, as modified in this section. For columns,
13 evaluation of shear strength according to Section 4.2.3 shall be permitted to be used.
14 The flexural strength of a slab to resist moment caused by lateral deformations shall be calculated
15 as MSlCSE MgUD,CS..
16 Slabcolumn connections shall be investigated for potential failure in shear and moment transfer,
17 considering the combined action of flexure, shear, and torsion acting in the slab at the connection
18 with the column.
19 For interior connections without transverse beams and exterior connections with moment about
20 an axis perpendicular to the slab edge, the shear and moment transfer strength, or the torsional
21 element strength, shall be permitted to be calculated as the minimum of
22 1. Strength calculated considering eccentricity of shear on a slab-critical section because of
23 combined shear and moment in accordance with ACI 318; and
Page 82 of 217
1 2. Moment transfer strength equal to MSlE / f , where MSlE is the sum of positive and
2 negative flexural strengths of a section of slab between lines that are two and one-half slab or
3 drop panel thicknesses outside opposite faces of the column or capital; f is the fraction of
4 the moment resisted by flexure per ACI 318.
5 For moment about an axis parallel to slab edge at exterior connections without transverse beams,
6 where the shear on the slab critical section caused by gravity loads does not exceed 0.75 VCPunE or
7 the shear at a corner support does not exceed 0.5 VCPunE, the moment transfer strength shall be
8 permitted to be taken as equal to the flexural strength of a section of slab between lines that are a
9 distance c1 outside opposite faces of the column or capital.
10
11 C4.4.3 Strength of SlabColumn Moment FramesAlternative expressions for calculating
12 momenttransferstrengthofinteriorandexteriorslabcolumnconnectionscanbefoundinLuo
13 etal.(1994),anddetailedmodelingrecommendationsforreinforcedandposttensionedconcrete
14 slabcolumnframes,aswellascomparisonswithshaketabletests,canbefoundinKangetal.
15 (2006).
16
17 4.4.4 Acceptance Criteria for SlabColumn Moment Frames

18 4.4.4.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresComponent actions shall be classified as being
19 deformation controlled or force controlled, as defined in Section 3.2.1. In primary components,
20 deformation-controlled actions shall be restricted to flexure in slabs and columns, and shear and
21 moment transfer in slabcolumn connections. In secondary components, deformation-controlled
22 actions are permitted in shear and reinforcement development (Table 16). All other actions shall
Page 83 of 217
1 be classified as force controlled.
2 Design actions on components shall be determined as prescribed in Chapter 7 of ASCE 41.
3 Where the calculated DCR values exceed unity, the following design actions shall be determined
4 using limit analysis principles as prescribed in Chapter 7 of ASCE 41:
5 1. Moments, shears, torsions, and development and splice actions corresponding to the
6 development of component strength in slabs and columns; and
7 2. Axial load in columns, considering likely plastic action in components above the level in
8 question.
9 Design actions shall be compared with strengths in accordance with Section 5.5.2.2 of ASCE 41,
10 and m-factors for slabcolumn frame components should be selected from Tables 9 and 16.
11 Where the average DCRs for columns at a level exceed the average value for slabs at the same
12 level and exceed the greater of 1.0 and m/2, the element shall be defined as a weak story element
13 and shall be evaluated by the procedure for weak story elements in Section 4.2.4.1.
14 4.4.4.2 Nonlinear Static and Dynamic ProceduresInelastic response shall be restricted to
15 actions in Tables 8 and 15, except where it is demonstrated by experimental evidence and analysis
16 that other inelastic actions are acceptable for the selected performance levels. Other actions shall
17 be defined as force controlled.
18 Calculated component actions shall satisfy the requirements of Section 5.5.3.2 of ASCE 41.
19 Maximum permissible inelastic deformations shall be taken from Tables 8 and 15. Alternative
20 values shall be permitted where justified by experimental evidence and analysis.
21
22 C4.4.4.2 NonlinearStaticandDynamicProceduresSectionC6.4.2.2hasadiscussionofTable
23 15andacceptancecriteriaforreinforcedconcreteslabcolumnconnections.SectionC6.2.2.2has
Page 84 of 217
1 adiscussionofTable8andacceptancecriteriaforreinforcedconcretecolumns.
3 4.4.5 Retrofit Measures for SlabColumn Moment FramesSeismic retrofit measures for slab
4 column moment frames shall meet the requirements of Section 5.7 and other provisions of this
5 standard.
6
7 C4.4.5 Retrofit Measures for SlabColumn Moment FramesRetrofit measures described in
8 Section C4.2.5 for reinforced concrete beamcolumn moment frames can also be effective in
9 rehabilitating reinforced concrete slabcolumn moment frames. Further retrofit measures are
10 foundinFEMA547(2007).
11 5PRECAST CONCRETE FRAMES

12 5.1Types of Precast Concrete Frames
13 Precast concrete frames shall be defined as those elements constructed from individually made
14 beams and columns assembled to resist externally applied loads through frame action. These
15 systems shall include those that are considered in design to resist seismic forces and those that are
16 considered in design as secondary elements that do not resist seismic forces but must resist the
17 effects of deformations resulting from seismic forces.
18 5.1.1 Precast Concrete Frames Expected to Resist Seismic ForcesFrames of this classification
19 are assembled using either wet or dry joints (connections are made by bolting, welding, post-
20 tensioning, or other similar means) in a way that results in significant seismic force resistance in
21 the frame element. Frames of this classification resist seismic forces either acting alone or acting
22 in conjunction with shear walls, braced frames, or other seismic-force-resisting elements.
Page 85 of 217
1
2 C5.1.1 PrecastConcreteFramesExpectedtoResistSeismicForcesThesesystemsarerecognized
3 andacceptedbyFEMAP750andarebasedonACI318,whichspecifiessafetyandserviceability
4 levelsexpectedfromprecastconcreteframeconstruction.Inthereferenceddocuments,precast
5 framesarenotclassifiedbythemethodofconstruction(wetordryjoints),butbytheexpected
6 behavior resulting from the detailing used. In addition to recognizing varying levels of ductile
7 performance as a result of overall frame detailing, ACI 318 Sections 18.9.2.1, 18.9.2.2, and
8 18.9.2.3acknowledgethreetypesofunittounitconnectionsthatcanresultinthehighestlevel
9 of performance. Such connections are either strong or ductile as defined in Sections 4.2,
10 18.9.2.1,18.9.2.2and18.9.2.3ofACI318orhavedemonstratedacceptableperformancewhere
11 testedinaccordancewithACIT1.101.
12
13 5.1.2 Precast Concrete Frames Not Expected to Resist Seismic Forces DirectlyFrames of this
14 classification shall be assembled using dry joints in a way that does not result in significant seismic
15 force resistance in the frame element. Other structural elements or systems such as shear walls,
16 braced frames, or moment frames provide the entire seismic force resistance, with the precast
17 concrete frame system deforming in a manner that is compatible with the structure as a whole.
18
19 5.2Precast Concrete Frames Expected to Resist Seismic Forces

20 5.2.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a frame element of this classification shall represent
21 strength, stiffness, and deformation capacity of beams, columns, beamcolumn joints, and other
22 components of the frame. Potential failure in flexure, shear, and reinforcement development at any
23 section along the component length shall be considered. Interaction with other components,
Page 86 of 217
1 including nonstructural components, shall be included. All other considerations of Section 4.2.1
2 shall be taken into account. In addition, the effects of shortening caused by creep, and other effects
3 of prestressing and post-tensioning on member behavior, shall be evaluated. Where dry joints are
4 used in assembling the precast system, consideration shall be given to the effect of those joints on
5 overall behavior. Where connections yield under the specified seismic forces, the analysis model
6 shall take this effect into account.
7
8 5.2.2 Stiffness of Precast Concrete Frames Expected to Resist Seismic ForcesStiffness for
9 analysis shall be as defined in Section 4.2.2. The effects of prestressing shall be considered where
10 computing the effective stiffness values using Table 5. Flexibilities associated with connections
11 shall be included in the analytical model.
12 5.2.3 Strength of Precast Concrete Frames Expected to Resist Seismic ForcesComponent
13 strength shall be computed according to the requirements of Section 4.2.3, with the additional
14 requirement that the following effects be included in the analysis:
15 1. Effects of prestressing that are present, including but
16 not limited to reduction in rotation capacity, secondary stresses induced, and amount of
17 effective prestress force remaining;
18 2. Effects of construction sequence, including the possibility of construction of the moment
19 connections occurring after portions of the structure are subjected to dead loads;
20 3. Effects of restraint caused by interaction with interconnected wall or brace components;
21 and
22 4. Effects of connection strength, considered in accordance with Section 3.6.
23 5.2.4 Acceptance Criteria for Precast Concrete Frames Expected to Resist Seismic
Page 87 of 217
1 ForcesAcceptance criteria for precast concrete frames expected to resist seismic forces shall be
2 as specified in Section 4.2.4, except that the factors defined in Section 5.2.3 shall also be
3 considered. Connections shall comply with the requirements of Section 4.6.
4 5.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Precast Concrete Frames Expected to Resist Seismic ForcesSeismic
5 retrofit measures for precast concrete frames shall meet the requirements of Section 3.7 and other
6 provisions of this standard and ASCE-41.
7
8 C5.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Precast Concrete Frames Expected to Resist Seismic ForcesThe
9 retrofitmeasuresdescribedinC4.2.5forreinforcedconcretebeamcolumnmomentframescan
10 also be effective in retrofitting precast concrete moment frames. When installing new
11 componentsormaterialstotheexistingsystem,existingprestressingstrandsshouldbeprotected.
12
13 5.3Precast Concrete Frames Not Expected to Resist Seismic Forces Directly

14 5.3.1 GeneralThe analytical model for precast concrete frames that are not expected to resist
15 seismic forces directly shall comply with the requirements of Section 5.2.1 and shall include the
16 effects of deformations that are calculated to occur under the specified seismic loadings.
17 5.3.2 Stiffness of Precast Concrete Frames Not Expected to Resist Seismic Forces DirectlyThe
18 analytical model shall include either realistic lateral stiffness of these frames to evaluate the effects
19 of deformations under seismic forces. If the lateral stiffness is ignored in the analytical model, the
20 effects of calculated building drift on these frames shall be evaluated separately. The analytical
21 model shall consider the negative effects of connection stiffness on component response where
22 that stiffness results in actions that can cause component failure.
23
Page 88 of 217
1 C5.3.2 StiffnessofPrecastConcreteFramesNotExpectedtoResistSeismicForcesDirectlyThe
2 stiffnessusedintheanalysisshouldconsiderpossibleresistancethatcandevelopunderlateral
3 deformation.Insomecases,itmaybeappropriatetoassumezerolateralstiffness.TheNorthridge
4 earthquakegraphicallydemonstratedthattherearefewinstanceswheretheprecastcolumncan
5 be considered to be completely pinned top and bottom, and as a consequence, not resist any
6 shear from building drift. Several parking structures collapsed as a result of this lack of fixity.
7 Conservativeassumptionsshouldbemade.
9 5.3.3 Strength of Precast Concrete Frames Not Expected to Resist Seismic Forces
10 DirectlyComponent strength shall be computed according to the requirements of Section 5.2.3.
11 All components shall have sufficient strength and ductility to transmit induced forces from one
12 member to another and to the designated seismic-force-resisting system.
13 5.3.4 Acceptance Criteria for Precast Concrete Frames Not Expected to Resist Seismic Forces
14 DirectlyAcceptance criteria for components in precast concrete frames not expected to resist
15 seismic forces directly shall be as specified in Section 5.2.4. All moments, shear forces, and axial
16 loads induced through the deformation of the structural system shall be checked using appropriate
17 criteria in the referenced section.
18 5.3.5 Retrofit Measures for Precast Concrete Frames Not Expected to Resist Seismic Forces
19 DirectlySeismic retrofit measures for precast moment frames shall meet the requirements of
20 Section 3.7 and other provisions of this standard.
21
22 C5.3.5 Retrofit Measures for Precast Concrete Frames Not Expected to Resist Seismic Forces
23 DirectlyThe retrofit measures described in C4.2.5 for reinforced concrete beamcolumn
Page 89 of 217
1 momentframescanalsobeeffectiveinretrofittingprecastconcreteframesnotexpectedtoresist
2 seismic forces directly. When installing new components or materials to the existing system,
3 existingprestressingstrandsshouldbeprotected.
4
5 6CONCRETE FRAMES WITH INFILLS
6 6.1Types of Concrete Frames with Infills
7 Concrete frames with infills consist of complete gravity-load-carrying concrete frames infilled
8 with masonry or concrete, constructed in such a way that the infill and the concrete frame interact
9 when subjected to gravity and seismic forces.
10 Infills are considered to be isolated from the surrounding frame when the minimum gap
11 requirements specified in Section 11.4.1 of ASCE 41 are satisfied. If all infills in a frame are
12 isolated, the frame shall be analyzed as an isolated frame according to provisions given in Chapters
13 6, 7, and 11, and the isolated infill panels shall be analyzed according to the requirements of
14 Chapter 11 of ASCE 41.
15 6.1.1 Types of FramesThe provisions of Chapter 6 shall apply to concrete frames, as defined in
16 Chapters 4, 5, and 9, which interact with infills.
17 6.1.2 Masonry InfillsThe provisions of Chapter 4 shall apply to masonry infills, as defined in
18 Chapter 11 of ASCE 41, which interact with concrete frames.
19 6.1.3 Concrete InfillsThe provisions of Chapter 6 shall apply to concrete infills that interact
20 with concrete frames, where the infills were constructed to fill the space within the bay of a
21 complete gravity frame without special provision for continuity from story to story. The concrete
22 of the infill shall be evaluated separately from the concrete of the frame.
23
Page 90 of 217
1 C6.1.3 ConcreteInfillsTheconstructionofconcreteinfilledframesissimilartothatofmasonry
2 infilled frames, except that the infill is of concrete instead of masonry units. In older existing
3 buildings,theconcreteinfillcommonlycontainsnominalreinforcement,whichoftendoesnotto
4 extendintothesurroundingframeelements.Theconcreteusedintheinfillisoftenoflowerquality
5 thanthatusedintheframeelementsandshouldbeevaluatedseparatelyfrominvestigationsof
6 theframeconcrete.
8 6.2Concrete Frames with Masonry Infills

9 6.2.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a concrete frame with masonry infills shall represent
10 strength, stiffness, and deformation capacity of beams, slabs, columns, beamcolumn joints,
11 masonry infills, and all connections and components of the element. Potential failure in flexure,
12 shear, anchorage, reinforcement development, or crushing at any section shall be considered.
13 Interaction with nonstructural components shall be included.
14 For a concrete frame with masonry infill resisting seismic forces within its plane, modeling of
15 the response using a linear elastic model shall be permitted provided that the infill does not crack
16 when subjected to design seismic forces. If the infill does not crack when subjected to design
17 seismic forces, modeling the assemblage of frame and infill as a homogeneous medium shall be
18 permitted.
19 For a concrete frame with masonry infills that cracks when subjected to design seismic forces,
20 modeling of the response using a diagonally braced frame model, in which the columns act as
21 vertical chords, the beams act as horizontal ties, and the infill acts as an equivalent compression
22 strut, shall be permitted. Requirements for the equivalent compression strut analogy shall be as
23 specified in Chapter 11 of ASCE 41.
Page 91 of 217
1 Frame components shall be evaluated for forces imparted to them through interaction of the
2 frame with the infill, as specified in Chapter 11 of ASCE 41. In frames with full-height masonry
3 infills, the evaluation shall include the effect of strut compression forces applied to the column and
4 beam, eccentric from the beamcolumn joint. In frames with partial-height masonry infills, the
5 evaluation shall include the reduced effective length of the columns above the infilled portion of
6 the bay.
7
8 C6.2.1 GeneralThelicenseddesignprofessionalisreferredtoFEMA274(1997b)andFEMA306
9 (1998b)foradditionalinformationregardingthebehaviorofmasonryinfills.
10
11 6.2.2 Stiffness of Concrete Frames with Masonry Infills

12 6.2.2.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresIn frames having infills in some bays and no
13 infill in other bays, the restraint of the infill shall be represented as described in Section 6.2.1. Bays
14 without infills shall be modeled as frames as specified in appropriate portions of Chapters 4, 5,
15 and 9. Where infills are discontinuous over the height, the effects of the discontinuity on overall
16 building performance shall be evaluated. Effective stiffnesses shall be in accordance with Section
17 3.1.2.
18 6.2.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations for use in analysis by the
19 NSP shall follow the requirements of Section 3.1.2.2.
20 Modeling beams and columns using nonlinear truss elements shall be permitted in infilled
21 portions of the frame. Beams and columns in noninfilled portions of the frame shall be modeled
22 using the relevant specifications of Chapters 4, 5, and 9. The model shall be capable of representing
23 inelastic response along the component lengths.
Page 92 of 217
1 Monotonic load-deformation relations shall be according to the generalized relation shown in
2 Fig. 1, except different relations shall be permitted where verified by tests. Numerical quantities
3 in Fig. 1 shall be derived from tests or by analytical procedures, as specified in Chapter 7 of ASCE
4 41, and shall take into account the interaction between frame and infill components. Alternatively,
5 the following procedure shall be permitted for monolithic reinforced concrete frames:
6 1. For beams and columns in bays without infills, where the generalized deformation is taken
7 as rotation in the flexural plastic hinge zone, the plastic hinge rotation capacities shall be as
8 defined by Tables 7 and 8.
9 2. For masonry infills, the generalized deformations and control points shall be as defined in
10 Chapter 11 of ASCE 41.
11 3. For beams and columns in bays with infills, where the generalized deformation is taken as
12 elongation or compression displacement of the beams or columns, the tension and
13 compression strain capacities shall be as specified in Table 17.
14 6.2.2.3 Nonlinear Dynamic ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations for use in analysis
15 by NDP shall model the complete hysteretic behavior of each component using properties verified
16 by tests. Unloading and reloading properties shall represent stiffness and strength degradation
17 characteristics.
18 6.2.3 Strength of Concrete Frames with Masonry InfillsStrengths of reinforced concrete
19 components shall be calculated according to the general requirements of Section 3.2, as modified
20 by other provisions of this standard. Strengths of masonry infills shall be calculated according to
21 the requirements of Chapter 11 of ASCE 41. Strength calculations shall consider the following:
22 1. Limitations imposed by beams, columns, and joints in noninfilled portions of frames;
23 2. Tensile and compressive capacity of columns acting as boundary components of infilled
Page 93 of 217
1 frames;
2 3. Local forces applied from the infill to the frame;
3 4. Strength of the infill; and
4 5. Connections with adjacent components.
5 6.2.4 Acceptance Criteria for Concrete Frames with Masonry Infills
6 6.2.4.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresAll component actions shall be classified as
7 either deformation controlled or force controlled, as defined in Section 7.5.1 of ASCE 41. In
8 primary components, deformation-controlled actions shall be restricted to flexure and axial actions
9 in beams, slabs, and columns, and lateral deformations in masonry infill panels. In secondary
10 components, deformation-controlled actions shall be restricted to those actions identified for the
11 isolated frame in Chapters 4, 5, and 9, as appropriate, and for the masonry infill in Section 11.4 of
12 ASCE 41.
13 Design actions shall be determined as prescribed in Chapter 7 of ASCE 41. Where calculated
14 DCR values exceed unity, the following design actions shall be determined using limit analysis
15 principles as prescribed in Chapter 7 of ASCE 41: (1) moments, shears, torsions, and development
16 and splice actions corresponding to development of component strength in beams, columns, or
17 masonry infills; and (2) column axial load corresponding to development of the flexural capacity
18 of the infilled frame acting as a cantilever wall.
19 Design actions shall be compared with strengths in accordance with Section 7.5.2.2 of ASCE 41.
20 Values of m-factors shall be as specified in Section 11.4.2.4 of ASCE 41for masonry infills;
21 applicable portions of Chapters 4, 5, and 9 for concrete frames; and Table 18 for columns modeled
22 as tension and compression chords. Those components that have design actions less than strengths
23 shall be assumed to satisfy the performance criteria for those components.
Page 94 of 217
1 6.2.4.2 Nonlinear Static and Dynamic ProceduresIn the design model, inelastic response shall
2 be restricted to those components and actions that are permitted for isolated frames as specified in
3 Sections 6, 7, and 11, and for masonry infills as specified in Section 11.4 of ASCE 41.
4 Calculated component actions shall satisfy the requirements of Section 7.5.3.2 of ASCE 41 and
5 shall not exceed the numerical values listed in Table 17; the relevant tables for isolated frames
6 given in Chapters 4, 5, and 9; and the relevant tables for masonry infills given in Chapter 11 of
7 ASCE 41. Component actions not listed in Tables 7, 8, and 10 shall be treated as force controlled.
8 Alternative approaches or values shall be permitted where justified by experimental evidence and
9 analysis.
10 6.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Concrete Frames with Masonry InfillsSeismic retrofit measures for
11 concrete frames with masonry infills shall meet the requirements of Section 3.7 and other
12 provisions of this standard.
13
14 C6.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Concrete Frames with Masonry InfillsThe retrofit measures
15 described in relevant commentary of Chapters 4, 5, and 9 for isolated frames, and retrofit
16 measuresdescribedinrelevantcommentaryofSection11.4ofASCE41formasonryinfills,can
17 also be effective in retrofitting concrete frames with masonry infills. The licensed design
18 professionalisreferredtoFEMA308(1998d)forfurtherinformationinthisregard.Inaddition,
19 thefollowingretrofitmeasurescanbeeffectiveinrehabilitatingconcreteframeswithinfills:
20 1. Posttensioning existing beams, columns, or joints using external posttensioned
21 reinforcement. Vertical posttensioning can be effective in increasing tensile capacity of
22 columnsactingasboundaryzones.Anchoragesshouldbelocatedawayfromregionswhere
23 inelasticactionisanticipatedandshouldbedesignedconsideringpossibleforcevariations
Page 95 of 217
1 causedbyseismicforces.
2 2. Modification of the element by selective material removal from the existing element.
3 Eithertheinfillshouldbecompletelyremovedfromtheframeorgapsshouldbeprovided
4 betweentheframeandtheinfill.Inthelattercase,thegaprequirementsofChapter11of
5 ASCE41shouldbesatisfiedandadequatemeasuresmustbetakentoguaranteetheoutof
6 planestabilityoftheinfill.
7 3. Changingthebuildingsystemtoreducethedemandsontheexistingelement.Examples
8 includetheadditionofsupplementaryseismicforceresistingelementssuchaswalls,steel
9 braces,orbuttresses;seismicisolation;andmassreduction.
10 6.3Concrete Frames with Concrete Infills

11 6.3.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a concrete frame with concrete infills shall represent the
12 strength, stiffness, and deformation capacity of beams, slabs, columns, beamcolumn joints,
13 concrete infills, and all connections and components of the elements. Potential failure in flexure,
14 shear, anchorage, reinforcement development, or crushing at any section shall be considered.
15 Interaction with nonstructural components shall be included.
16 The analytical model shall be established considering the relative stiffness and strength of the
17 frame and the infill, as well as the level of deformations and associated damage. For low
18 deformation levels, and for cases where the frame is relatively flexible, the infilled frame shall be
19 permitted to be modeled as a shear wall, with openings modeled where they occur. In other cases,
20 the frame-infill system shall be permitted to be modeled using a braced-frame analogy such as that
21 described for concrete frames with masonry infills in Section 6.2.
22 Frame components shall be evaluated for forces imparted to them through interaction of the
23 frame with the infill as specified in Chapter 11 of ASCE 41. In frames with full-height infills, the
Page 96 of 217
1 evaluation shall include the effect of strut compression forces applied to the column and beam
2 eccentric from the beamcolumn joint. In frames with partial-height infills, the evaluation shall
3 include the reduced effective length of the columns above the infilled portion of the bay.
4 In frames with infills in only some bays, the restraint of the infill shall be represented as described
5 in this section. Bays without infills shall be modeled as frames as specified in appropriate portions
6 of Chapters 4, 5, and 9. Where infills create a discontinuous wall over the height, the effects of the
7 discontinuity on overall building performance shall be evaluated.
8 6.3.2 Stiffness of Concrete Frames with Concrete Infills
9 6.3.2.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresEffective stiffnesses shall be calculated
10 according to the principles of Section 3.1.2.1 and the procedure of Section 6.2.2.1.
11 6.3.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations for use in analysis by
12 NSP shall follow the requirements of Section 3.1.2.2.
13 Monotonic load-deformation relations shall be according to the generalized relation shown in
14 Fig. 1, except that different relations shall be permitted where verified by tests. Numerical
15 quantities in Fig. 1 shall be derived from tests or by analysis procedures specified in Section 7.6
16 of ASCE 41 and shall take into account the interactions between frame and infill components.
17 Alternatively, the procedure of Section 4.2.2.2 shall be permitted for the development of nonlinear
18 modeling parameters for concrete frames with concrete infills.
21 by tests. Unloading and reloading properties shall represent stiffness and strength degradation
22 characteristics.
23 6.3.3 Strength of Concrete Frames with Concrete InfillsStrengths of reinforced concrete
Page 97 of 217
1 components shall be calculated according to the general requirements of Section 4.2, as modified
2 by other specifications of this chapter. Strength calculations shall consider the following:
3 1. Limitations imposed by beams, columns, and joints in unfilled portions of frames;
4 2. Tensile and compressive capacity of columns acting as boundary components of infilled
5 frames;
6 3. Local forces applied from the infill to the frame;
7 4. Strength of the infill; and
8 5. Connections with adjacent components.
9 Strengths of existing concrete infills shall be determined considering shear strength of the infill
10 panel. For this calculation, procedures specified in Section 7.2.3 shall be used for calculation of
11 the shear strength of a wall segment.
12 Where the frame and concrete infill are assumed to act as a monolithic wall, flexural strength
13 shall be based on continuity of vertical reinforcement in both (1) the columns acting as boundary
14 components and (2) the infill wall, including anchorage of the infill reinforcement in the boundary
15 frame.
16 6.3.4 Acceptance Criteria for Concrete Frames with Concrete InfillsThe acceptance criteria for
17 concrete frames with concrete infills shall comply with relevant acceptance criteria of Section
18 6.2.4, Chapter 7, and Chapter 8.
19 6.3.5 Retrofit Measures for Concrete Frames with Concrete InfillsSeismic retrofit measures for
20 concrete frames with concrete infills shall meet the requirements of Section 3.7 and other
21 provisions of this standard and ASCE 41.
22
23 C6.3.5 RetrofitMeasuresforConcreteFrameswithConcreteInfillsRetrofitmeasuresdescribed
Page 98 of 217
1 inSectionC6.2.5forconcreteframeswithmasonryinfillscanalsobeeffectiveinrehabilitating
2 concreteframeswithconcreteinfills.Inaddition,applicationofshotcretetothefaceofanexisting
3 walltoincreasethethicknessandshearstrengthcanbeeffective.Forthispurpose,thefaceof
4 the existing wall should be roughened, a mat of reinforcing steel should be doweled into the
5 existingstructure,andshotcreteshouldbeappliedtothedesiredthickness.Thelicenseddesign
6 professionalisreferredtoFEMA308(1998d)forfurtherinformationregardingretrofitofconcrete
7 frameswithconcreteinfill.
9 7CONCRETE STRUCTURAL WALLS
10 7.1 Types of Concrete Structural Walls and Associated Components
11 The provisions of Chapter 7 shall apply to all reinforced concrete structural walls in all types of
12 structural systems that incorporate reinforced concrete structural walls. This set of types includes
13 isolated structural walls, structural walls used in wall-frame systems, coupled structural walls, and
14 discontinuous structural walls. Structural walls shall be permitted to be considered as solid walls
15 if they have openings that do not significantly influence the strength or inelastic behavior of the
16 wall. Perforated structural walls shall be defined as walls that have a regular pattern of openings
17 in both horizontal and vertical directions that creates a series of wall pier (vertical wall segment)
18 and deep beam components (horizontal wall segment).
19 Coupling beams shall comply with provisions of Section 7.2 and shall be exempted from the
20 provisions for beams covered in Chapter 4.
21
Page 99 of 217
1 C7.1TypesofConcreteStructuralWallsandAssociatedComponentsConcretestructuralwalls
2 are planar vertical elements or combinations of interconnected planar elements that serve as
3 lateralloadresistingelementsinconcretestructures.Structuralwalls(orwallsegments)shallbe
4 consideredslenderiftheiraspectratio(hw/lw,height/length)is>3.0andshallbeconsideredshort
5 orsquatiftheiraspectratiois<1.5.Slenderwallsarenormallycontrolledbyflexuralbehavior;
6 shortwallsarenormallycontrolledbyshearbehavior.Theresponseofwallswithintermediate
7 aspectratiosisinfluencedbybothflexureandshear.
8 Identificationofcomponenttypesinconcretestructuralwallelementsdepends,tosomedegree,
9 on the relative strengths of the wall segments based on expected or measured material
10 properties.Verticalsegmentsareoftentermedwallpiers,whereashorizontalsegmentscanbe
11 called coupling beams or spandrels. The licensed design professional is referred to FEMA 306
12 (1998b)foradditionalinformationregardingthebehaviorofconcretewallcomponents.Selected
13 informationfromFEMA306(1998b)hasbeenreproducedinthecommentaryofthisstandard,in
14 TableC3andFig.C3toclarifywallcomponentidentification.
Page 100 of 217

1
2 7.1.1 Monolithic Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls and Wall SegmentsMonolithic
3 reinforced concrete structural walls shall consist of vertical cast-in-place elements, either
4 uncoupled or coupled, in open or closed shapes. These walls shall have relatively continuous cross
5 sections and reinforcement and shall provide both vertical and lateral force resistance, in contrast
6 with infilled walls defined in Section 6.1.3.
7 Structural walls or wall segments with axial loads greater than 0.35 Po shall not be considered
8 effective in resisting seismic forces. For the purpose of determining effectiveness of structural
9 walls or wall segments, the use of axial loads based on a limit state analysis shall be permitted.
10
11 C7.1.1 Monolithic Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls and Wall SegmentsThe wall
12 reinforcementisnormallycontinuousinboththehorizontalandverticaldirections,andbarsare
13 typicallylapsplicedfortensioncontinuity.Thereinforcementmeshcanalsocontainhorizontal
14 ties around vertical bars that are concentrated either near the vertical edges of a wall with
15 constantthicknessorinboundarymembersformedatthewalledges.Theamountandspacing
16 ofthesetiesisimportantfordetermininghowwelltheconcreteatthewalledgeisconfinedand
17 thusfordeterminingthelateraldeformationcapacityofthewall.
18 Ingeneral,slenderreinforcedconcretestructuralwallsaregovernedbyflexureandtendtoform
19 aplasticflexuralhingenearthebaseofthewallunderseverelateralloading.Theductilityofthe
20 wall is a function of the percentage of longitudinal reinforcement concentrated near the
21 boundaries of the wall, the level of axial load, the amount of lateral shear required to cause
22 flexuralyielding,thethickness,thereinforcementusedinthewebportionoftheshearwall,and
Page 101 of 217

1 the transverse reinforcement in the boundary elements, including the ratio of the transverse
2 reinforcementspacingtothediameterofthelongitudinalreinforcingbars.Ingeneral,higheraxial
3 load stresses and higher shear stresses reduce the flexural ductility and energyabsorbing
4 capabilityofthewall.Shortorsquatstructuralwallsarenormallygovernedbyshear.Thesewalls
5 normallyhavealimitedabilitytodeformbeyondtheelasticrangeandcontinuetoresistseismic
6 forces. Thus, these walls are typically analyzed either as displacementcontrolled components
7 withlowductilitycapacitiesorasforcecontrolledcomponents.
Page 102 of 217

1 7.1.2 Reinforced Concrete Columns Supporting Discontinuous Structural WallsReinforced
2 concrete columns supporting discontinuous structural walls shall be analyzed in accordance with
3 the requirements of Section 4.2.
5 C7.1.2 Reinforced Concrete Columns Supporting Discontinuous Structural WallsIn structural
6 wall buildings, it is not uncommon to find that some walls are terminated either to create
7 commercialspaceinthefirststoryortocreateparkingspacesinthebasement.Insuchcases,the
8 wallsarecommonlysupportedbycolumns.Suchdesignsarenotrecommendedinseismiczones
9 becauseverylargedemandscanbeplacedonthesecolumnsduringearthquakeloading.Inolder
10 buildings, such columns often have "standard" longitudinal and transverse reinforcement; the
11 behaviorofsuchcolumnsduringpastearthquakesindicatesthattightlyspacedclosedtieswith
12 wellanchored135degreehooksarerequiredforthebuildingtosurvivesevereseismicforces.
13
14 7.1.3 Reinforced Concrete Coupling BeamsReinforced concrete coupling beams used to link
15 two shear walls together shall be evaluated and rehabilitated to comply with the requirements of
16 Section 7.2.
17
18 C7.1.3 Reinforced Concrete Coupling BeamsCoupled walls are generally much stiffer and
19 strongerthantheywouldbeiftheyactedindependently.Couplingbeamstypicallyhaveasmall
20 spantodepth ratio, and their inelastic behavior is normally affected by the high shear forces
21 acting in these components. Coupling beams in most older reinforced concrete buildings
22 commonly have "conventional" reinforcement that consists of longitudinal flexural steel and
Page 103 of 217

1 transverse steel for shear. In some more modern buildings, or in buildings where coupled
2 structuralwallsareusedforseismicretrofit,thecouplingbeamscanusediagonalreinforcement
3 astheprimaryreinforcementforbothflexureandshear.Theinelasticbehaviorofcouplingbeams
4 thatusediagonalreinforcementhasbeenshownexperimentallytobemuchbetterwithrespect
5 toretentionofstrength,stiffness,andenergydissipationcapacitythantheobservedbehaviorof
6 couplingbeamswithconventionalreinforcement.
8 7.2Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls, Wall Segments, and Coupling Beams
9 7.2.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a structural wall element shall represent the stiffness,
10 strength, and deformation capacity of the wall. Potential failure in flexure, shear, and
11 reinforcement development at any point in the wall shall be considered. Interaction with other
12 structural and nonstructural components shall be included.
13 Slender structural walls and wall segments shall be permitted to be modeled as equivalent beam
14 column elements that include both flexural and shear deformations. The flexural strength of beam
15 column elements shall include the interaction of axial load and bending and shall be calculated
16 based on expected material properties. The rigid connection zone at beam connections to this
17 equivalent beamcolumn element shall represent the distance from the wall centroid to the edge
18 of the wall. Unsymmetrical wall sections shall be modeled with the different bending capacities
19 for the two loading directions.
20 A beam element that incorporates both bending and shear deformations shall be used to model
21 coupling beams. The inelastic response shall account for the loss of shear strength and stiffness
22 during reversed cyclic loading to large deformations. For coupling beams that have diagonal
Page 104 of 217

1 reinforcement satisfying ACI 318 requirements, a beam element representing flexure only shall be
2 permitted.
3 The diaphragm action of concrete slabs that interconnect shear walls and frame columns shall be
4 represented in the model.
6 C7.2.1GeneralForrectangularstructuralwalls,wallsegmentswithhw/lw2.5andflangedwall
7 sectionswithhw/lw 3.5,eitheramodifiedbeamcolumnanalogyoramultiplenode,multiple
8 springapproachshouldbeused.Becausestructuralwallsusuallyrespondinsinglecurvatureover
9 a story height, one multiplespring element per story can be used for modeling walls. Wall
10 segments should be modeled with either the beamcolumn element or with a multiplespring
11 modelwithtwoelementsoverthelengthofthewallsegment.
12 Coupling beams that have diagonal reinforcement satisfying ACI 318 requirements commonly
13 have a stable hysteretic response under large load reversals. Therefore, these members could
14 adequatelybemodeledwithbeamelementsusedfortypicalframeanalyses.
15
16 7.2.2 Stiffness of Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls, Wall Segments, and Coupling
17 BeamsThe effective stiffness of all the elements discussed in Chapter 9 shall be defined based
18 on the material properties, component dimensions, reinforcement quantities, boundary conditions,
19 and current state of the member with respect to cracking and stress levels. Alternatively, use of
20 values for effective stiffness given in Table 5 shall be permitted.
21 For coupling beams, the effective stiffness values given in Table 5 for nonprestressed beams shall
22 be used unless alternative stiffnesses are determined by more detailed analysis.
Page 105 of 217

1
2 C7.2.2Elementstiffnessrecommendationsforflexurecontrolledstructuralwallsareintendedto
3 provide a secanttoyield stiffness, neglecting the effect of wall stiffness properties prior to
4 flexural cracking on the calculated response. When significant flexural cracking is expected to
5 occur,theinitialwallstiffnessisnotconsideredtohaveasignificanteffectoncalculatednonlinear
6 deformations because demands generally exceed the cracking load during the first significant
7 cycleofdynamicloading.Incaseswherelittletonocrackingisexpectedtooccur,thelicensed
8 design professional can use iterative analytical techniques to obtain a more accurate
9 approximationofthewallstiffness.
10 Inordertocalculatetheeffectivestiffnesstoyieldofflexurecontrolledwalls,severalresearchers
11 andstandardshaverecommendedusingareductionfactorforthegrossmomentofinertiaof0.5
12 timesIg.However,experimentalstudiesofslenderwallspushedtoyieldleveldriftshaveshown
13 lowerstiffnessreductionfactors,intherangeof0.15to0.25timesthegrossmomentofinertia
14 (ATC72; Panagiotu and Restrepo 2007; Priestley, Calvi, and Kowalsky 2007). An important
15 limitationofthistypeofapproachisthatthecalculatedeffectivewallstiffnessisindependentof
16 parameterssuchastheverticalreinforcementratioandaxialload.
17 For a given concrete crosssection, studies have shown that yield curvature is not sensitive to
18 reinforcingratioandaxialloads(WallaceandMoehle,1992).Equationsthatrelyontheyield
19 curvature to calculate the effective stiffness (Priestley 1998) have been shown to provide
20 estimatesofeffectivestiffnessthatareinreasonableagreementwithexperimentallymeasured
21 values when axial loads and reinforcement ratios are relatively low. For the case where
Page 106 of 217

1 NUG/(AgfcE) 0.15 and l 0.01, the effective yield curvature, yE , can be approximated for
2 planarconcretewallsas:
2 f ylE
3 yE (C4)
l w ES
4 Forflexuraldeformationswithouttheeffectofbondslip,theeffectiveflexuralrigidity,(EI)eff,can
5 becalculatedinaccordancewithEq.C5:
M yE
6 ( EI ) eff (C5)
yE
7 whereMyEisevaluatedusinganappliedaxialloadNUG.
8 Alternatively,momentcurvatureanalysiscanbeused,andamoregeneralrelationshipforwall
9 flexuralrigiditycanbederived:
M fyE
10 ( EI )eff (C6)
fyE
11 whereMfyEisevaluatedusinganappliedaxialloadNUG.
12 Where inadequate anchorage or splices are present, the calculated moment strength used to
13 evaluate wall flexural rigidity should be based on the reduced reinforcement capacity in
14 accordancewithSection3.5.
15 When bond slip is expected at the interface between the structural wall and the anchoring
16 supportingelement,theadditionalflexibilityattheinterfaceshouldbeaccountedfor.Arigid
17 bodyrotationassociatedwithbondslipofthelongitudinalreinforcingbarswithinthefoundation
18 occursatthewalltofoundationinterface,whichaddstowalldeformations.Wherethistypeof
19 behaviorisanticipated,theadditionalflexibilitycanbeaccountedforeitherimplicitlybyreducing
Page 107 of 217

1 thewalleffectiveflexuralrigidityorexplicitlybyintroducingaflexiblerotationalspring.Thereare
2 severalmethodologiesavailableforapproximatingbondslip.
3 Forcontinuouswalls,anacceptableapproachforcapturingtheeffectsofbondslipistomodifying
4 theeffectiveflexuralrigidityofthewallinthestorydirectlyabovetheinterfaceasfollows:
M fyE h1
5 ( EI )eff (C7)
fyE h1 lsp
6 Eq.C7assumesaconstantyieldcurvatureprofileoverthefirstfloorheight,h1,andcompareswell
7 againstshaketabletestingfrommultistorybuildingprototypes.Withthismethod,theflexibility
8 associatedwithbarslipislumpedwithinthestoryabovetheinterface,andonlythemomentof
9 inertiaovertheheight,h1,ismodifiedforbondslip.Abovetheheighth1,Eq.C6canbeusedto
10 estimate wall flexural rigidity using yield moments and curvatures atwall hingesor using the
11 expectedmaximummomentsandassociatedcurvaturesatthelevelsconsidered.
12 Note,thestrainpenetrationdepth,lsp,inthisequationismeanttoapproximatethelengthover
13 whichflexurallongitudinalbarstrainspenetrateintothefoundationsystemandcanbe
14 approximatedasfollowsforthepurposeofapproximatingbarslip.EquationC5wasderived
15 assuminganaveragebondstressof 12 f c' psi ,whichwasshowntobeanappropriate
16 estimateofaveragebarstressesintothefoundationunderearthquakeexcitations(Ghannoum
17 andMoehle2012).Otherequationsandmethodologieshavebeenproposedtoaccountfor
18 strainpenetrationanddeformationsfrombarslip(Priestley,Calvi,andKowalsky2007).
1 f ylE
19 lsp db (C8)
48 fcE'
Page 108 of 217

1 Forplanebars,lspcanbetakenastwicethevalueobtainedfromEq.C8.Asanalternativeto
2 modifyingtheflexuralrigiditytoaccountforbarslip,arotationalspringcanbeusedtoexplicitly
3 captureslip,wherethespringstiffnessisdefinedas:
2 M fyE
4 KR (C9)
fyE lsp
5 Inplaceof fyE andMfyE, yE andMyEcanbeusedinEqs.C7,C8,andC9toaccountforbar
6 slipeffects.
7 ApproximateclosedformmethodscanbeusedtocalculateMyEforthepurposeofestimatingthe
8 effectiveflexuralrigidityofplanarwallsasshowninEq.C10(Cardenasetal,1973).Eq.C10was
9 simplified to approximate the effects of the neutral axis depth and should be used only when
10 reinforcingratiosandaxialdemandsarerelativelylow(seeEq.C4).
N
11 M yE 0.45 Asl f ylElw 1 UG .(C10)
Asl f ylE

12 ( EI )eff shouldbeintherangeof0.15EcEIgand0.5EcEIgwhentheequationsinC4toC10areused
13 forcrackedwalls.
Page 109 of 217

1
2 7.2.2.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresStructural walls and associated components shall
3 be modeled considering axial, flexural, and shear stiffness. For closed and open wall shapes, such
4 as box, T, L, I, and C sections, the effective tension or compression flange widths shall be as
5 specified in Section 3.1.3. The calculated stiffnesses to be used in analysis shall be in accordance
6 with the requirements of Section 3.1.2.
7 Joints between structural walls and frame elements shall be modeled as stiff components or rigid
8 components, as appropriate.
9 7.2.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations for use in analysis by
10 nonlinear static and dynamic procedures shall comply with the requirements of Section 3.1.2.
11 Monotonic load-deformation relationships for analytical models that represent structural walls,
12 wall segments, and coupling beams shall be in accordance with the generalized relation shown in
13 Fig. 1.
14 For structural walls and wall segments that have inelastic behavior under lateral loading that is
15 governed by flexure, the following approach shall be permitted. The load-deformation relationship
16 in Fig. 1 shall be used with the x-axis of Fig. 1 taken as the rotation over the plastic hinging region
17 at the end of the member shown in Fig. 4. The hinge rotation at point B in Fig. 1 corresponds to
18 the yield point, y, and shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 5:
M yE
19 yE lp (5)
EI eff

20
21 where
22 lp = Assumed plastic hinge length.
Page 110 of 217

1 For analytical models of shear walls, the value of lp shall be set equal to the lesser of 0.5 times the
2 effective flexural depth of the member and one story height of the member. For analytical models
3 of wall segments, as defined in Section 9.1, the value of lp shall be set equal to the lesser of 0.5
4 times the effective flexural depth of the member and 50% of the element length.
5 Values for the variables anl, bnl, and cnl required to define the location of points C, D, and E in Fig.
6 1(a) shall be as specified in Table 19.
7 For structural walls and wall segments whose inelastic response is controlled by shear, the
8 following approach shall be permitted. The load-deformation relationship in Fig. 1(c) shall be
9 used, with the x-axis of Fig. 1(c) taken as the lateral drift ratio. Alternatively, the load-deformation
10 relationship in Fig. 1(b) shall be permitted, with the x-axis of Fig. 1(b) taken as the lateral drift
11 ratio. For structural walls, this drift shall be the story drift, as shown in Fig. 5. For wall segments,
12 Fig. 5 shall represent the member drift.
13 For coupling beams, the following approach shall be permitted. The load-deformation relationship
14 in Fig. 1(b) shall be used, with the x-axis of Fig. 1(b) taken as the chord rotation as defined in Fig.
15 6.
16 Values for the variables dnl, enl, fnl, gnl, and cnl required to find the points B, C, D, E, and F in Fig.
17 1(b) or 1(c) shall be as specified in Table 20 for the appropriate members. Linear interpolation
18 between tabulated values shall be used if the member under analysis has conditions that are
19 between the limits given in the tables.
20
21 C7.2.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureThe recommended backbone shape and parameters
22 providedforconcretestructuralwallsdiffersfromthegeneralbackbonedescriptioninChapter7
23 ofASCE41.Forwallswithshearspantodepthratiosbelow2.5,theloaddeformationrelationship
Page 111 of 217

1 inFig.1(c)providesabetterrepresentationofthebehaviorthanthatinFig.1(b).Thereasonis
2 that in walls with low shearspantodepth ratios the deformations related to shear are not
3 negligiblecomparedwiththedeformationsrelatedtoflexure.Theproposedrelationshipisbased
4 onamodelinwhichthetotaldeflectioniscalculatedasthesumofcontributionsofcomponents
5 related to flexure, shear, and slip of the reinforcement. The drift ratio and shear force
6 corresponding to inclined cracking in Fig. 1(c) were obtained by simplifying expressions for
7 principal stresses for a limiting concrete tensile strength of approximately 4 f c ' Sozen and
8 Moehle(1993).Definitionoftheyieldpointandthelateralstrengthdegradationpointarebased
9 on limited test data (e.g., Hidalgo et al. 2002), as summarized by Wallace in the PEER/EERI
10 seminar,NewInformationonSeismicPerformanceofConcreteBuildings(PEER/EERI2006).Note
11 thatvariablesF,g,andfinFig.1(c)arenotthesameasthoseusedinChapter7ofASCE41.
12 FurtherdiscussiononthedevelopmentofthisbackbonemodelisprovidedinElwoodetal.(2007).
Page 112 of 217

1
2 7.2.2.3 Nonlinear Dynamic ProcedureFor the Nonlinear Dynamic Procedure (NDP), the
3 complete hysteretic behavior of each component shall be modeled using properties verified by
4 experimental evidence. Use of the generalized load-deformation relation shown in Fig. 1 to
5 represent the envelope relation for the analysis shall be permitted. The unloading and reloading
6 stiffnesses and strengths, and any pinching of the load-versus-rotation hysteresis loops, shall
7 reflect the behavior experimentally observed for wall elements similar to the one under
8 investigation.
9 7.2.3 Strength of Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls, Wall Segments, and Coupling
10 BeamsComponent strengths shall be computed according to the general requirements of Section
11 3.2, with the additional requirements of this section. Strength shall be determined considering the
12 potential for failure in flexure, shear, or development under combined gravity and lateral load.
13 The flexural strength of structural walls or wall segments, My, shall be determined using the
14 fundamental principles given in Chapter 22 of ACI 318. For calculation of flexural strength, as
15 represented by point B in Fig. 1(a), the effective compression and tension flange widths defined in
16 Section 7.2.2 shall be used, except that the first limit shall be changed to one-tenth of the wall
17 height. Where calculating the maximum inelastic flexural strength of the wall, Mpr, as represented
18 by point C in Fig. 1(a), the effects from strain hardening shall be accounted for by substituting fylE
19 with 1.25fylE. For all moment strength calculations, the yield strength of the longitudinal
20 reinforcement shall be taken as lower bound or expected material properties as applicable to
21 deformation-controlled or force-controlled actions, respectively. For all moment strength
22 calculations, the axial load acting on the wall shall include gravity loads, as defined in Section
23 7.2.2 of ASCE 41.
Page 113 of 217

1 The nominal shear strength of a structural wall or wall segment shall be determined based on the
2 principles and equations given in Chapter 18 of ACI 318, except that the restriction on spacing,
3 reinforcement ratio, and the number of curtains of reinforcement shall not apply to existing walls.
4 There shall be no difference between the yield and nominal shear strengths, as represented by
5 points B and C in Fig. 1.
6 Where an existing shear wall or wall segment has a transverse reinforcement percentage, t, less
7 than 0.0015 or where the cracking moment strength exceeds the yield strength, the wall shall be
8 considered force-controlled.
9 Splice lengths for primary longitudinal reinforcement shall be evaluated using the procedures
10 given in Section 3.5. Reduced flexural strengths shall be evaluated at locations where splices
11 govern the usable stress in the reinforcement. The need for confinement reinforcement in boundary
12 elements shall be evaluated by the procedure in ACI 318 or other approved procedure.
13 The nominal flexural and shear strengths of coupling beams shall be evaluated using the principles
14 and equations contained in Chapter 18 of ACI 318. The expected strength of longitudinal or
15 diagonal reinforcement shall be used.
16
17 C7.2.3 Strength of Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls, Wall Segments, and Coupling
18 BeamsDatapresentedbyWood(1990)indicatethatwallstrengthisinsensitivetothequantity
19 oftransversereinforcementwhereitdropsbelowasteelratioof0.0015.
20 The need for confinement reinforcement in wall boundary elements can be evaluated by the
21 method recommended by Wallace (1994 and 1995) for determining maximum lateral
22 deformationsinthewallandtheresultingmaximumcompressionstrainsinthewallboundary.
Page 114 of 217

1 StrengthcalculationsbasedonACI318,excludingChapter14,assumeamaximumspacingofwall
2 reinforcement. No data are available to justify performance for walls that do not meet the
3 maximumspacingrequirements.Ifplainconcreteisencounteredinanexistingbuilding,Chapter
4 14ofACI318canbeusedtoderivecapacities,andSection9.6ofASCE41canbeusedtodevelop
5 acceptancecriteria.
6 Chapter18ofACI318requiresthatatleasttwocurtainsofreinforcementbeusedinawallifVu
7 exceeds 2Acv fc ' oriftheaspectratioisgreaterthanorequalto2.0.Experimentalresultsby
8 Hidalgoetal.(2002)showthatforrelativelythinwallsthereisnosignificantdifferencebetween
9 thestrengthofwallswithoneortwocurtainsofwebreinforcementElwoodetal.(2007).
10
11 7.2.4 Acceptance Criteria for Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls, Wall Segments, and Coupling
12 Beams
13 7.2.4.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresStructural walls, wall segments, and coupling
14 beams shall be classified as either deformation- or force-controlled, as defined in Section 5.5.1 of
15 ASCE 41. In these components, deformation-controlled actions shall be restricted to flexure or
16 shear. All other actions shall be treated as force-controlled.
17 The flexural strength of a structural wall or wall segment shall be used to determine the maximum
18 shear force in structural walls and wall segments. For cantilever structural walls, the shear force
19 shall be equal to the magnitude of the lateral force required to develop the nominal flexural strength
20 at the base of the wall, assuming that the lateral force is distributed uniformly over the height of
21 the wall. For wall segments, the shear force shall be equal to the shear corresponding to the
Page 115 of 217

1 development of the positive and negative nominal moment strengths at opposite ends of the wall
2 segment.
3 Design actions (flexure, shear, axial, or force transfer at rebar anchorages and splices) on
4 components shall be determined as prescribed in Chapter 7 of ASCE 41. Where determining the
5 appropriate value for the design actions, proper consideration shall be given to gravity loads and
6 to the maximum forces that can be transmitted considering nonlinear action in adjacent
7 components. Design actions shall be compared with strengths in accordance with Section 7.5.2.2
8 of ASCE 41. Tables 21 and 22 specify m-factors for use in Eq. 7-36 of ASCE 41. Alternate m-
9 factors shall be permitted where justified by experimental evidence and analysis.
10
11 C7.2.4.1LinearStaticandDynamicProceduresForshearcontrolledcouplingbeams,ductility
12 isafunctionoftheshearinthememberasdeterminedbytheexpectedshearcapacityofthe
13 member.InaccordancewithSection3.2,expectedstrengthsarecalculatedusingtheprocedures
14 specifiedinACI318.Forcouplingbeams,theconcretecontributiontoshearstrengthisnearly
15 alwayszero.
16
17 7.2.4.2 Nonlinear Static and Dynamic ProceduresIn the design model, inelastic response shall
18 be restricted to those components and actions listed in Tables 19 and 20, except where it is
19 demonstrated that other inelastic actions are justified for the selected performance levels. For
20 members experiencing inelastic behavior, the magnitude of other actions (forces, moments, or
21 torque) in the member shall correspond to the magnitude of the action causing inelastic behavior.
22 The magnitude of these other actions shall be shown to be below their nominal capacities.
Page 116 of 217

1 Components experiencing inelastic response shall satisfy the requirements of Section 7.5.3.2 of
2 ASCE 41, and the maximum plastic hinge rotations, drifts, or chord rotation angles shall not exceed
3 the values given in Tables 19 and 20 for the selected Performance Level. Linear interpolation
4 between tabulated values shall be used if the member under analysis has conditions that are
5 between the limits given in the tables.
6 7.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls, Wall Segments, and Coupling
7 BeamsSeismic retrofit measures for reinforced concrete structural walls, wall segments,
8 coupling beams, and columns supporting discontinuous structural walls shall meet the
9 requirements of Section 3.7 and other provisions of this standard.
10
11 C7.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Reinforced Concrete Shear Walls, Wall Segments, and Coupling
12 BeamsThefollowingmeasurescanbeeffectiveinretrofittingreinforcedstructuralwalls,wall
13 segments,couplingbeams,andreinforcedconcretecolumnssupportingdiscontinuousstructural
14 walls:
15 1. Addition of wall boundary elements. Addition of boundary elements can be an effective
16 measure in strengthening walls or wall segments that have insufficient flexural strength.
17 Thesememberscanbeeithercastinplacereinforcedconcretecomponentsorsteelsections.
18 Inbothcases,properconnectionsshouldbemadebetweentheexistingwallandtheadded
19 components. The shear demand and shear capacity of the retrofitted wall should be
20 reevaluated.
21 2. Additionofconfinementjacketsatwallboundaries.Increasingtheconfinementatthewall
22 boundariesbytheadditionofasteelorreinforcedconcretejacketcanbeaneffectivemeasure
Page 117 of 217

1 inimprovingtheflexuraldeformationcapacityofastructuralwall.Forbothtypesofjackets,
2 thelongitudinalsteelshouldnotbecontinuousfromstorytostoryunlessthejacketisalso
3 being used to increase the flexural capacity. The minimum thickness for a concrete jacket
4 should be 3 in. Carbon fiber wrap should be permitted for improving the confinement of
5 concreteincompression.
6 3. Reductionofflexuralstrength.Reductionintheflexuralcapacityofastructuralwalltochange
7 thegoverningfailuremodefromsheartoflexurecanbeaneffectiveretrofitmeasure.Itcan
8 beaccomplishedbysawcuttingaspecifiednumberoflongitudinalbarsneartheedgesofthe
9 wall.
10 4. Increasedshearstrengthofwall.Increasingtheshearstrengthofthewebofastructuralwall
11 bycastingadditionalreinforcedconcreteadjacenttothewallwebcanbeaneffectiveretrofit
12 measure.Thenewconcreteshouldbeatleast4in.thickandshouldcontainhorizontaland
13 verticalreinforcement.Thenewconcreteshouldbeproperlybondedtotheexistingwebof
14 thestructuralwall.Theuseofcarbonfibersheets,epoxiedtotheconcretesurface,shouldalso
15 bepermittedtoincreasetheshearcapacityofashearwall.
16 5. Confinement jackets to improve deformation capacity of coupling beams and columns
17 supportingdiscontinuousstructuralwalls.Theuseofconfinementjacketsspecifiedaboveas
18 a retrofit measure for wall boundaries, and in Chapter 2 for frame elements, can also be
19 effective in increasing both the shear capacity and the deformation capacity of coupling
20 beamsandcolumnssupportingdiscontinuousstructuralwalls.
21 6. Infillingbetweencolumnssupportingdiscontinuousstructuralwalls.Whereadiscontinuous
22 structural wall is supported on columns that lack either sufficient strength or deformation
Page 118 of 217

1 capacitytosatisfydesigncriteria,makingthewallcontinuousbyinfillingtheopeningbetween
2 thesecolumnscanbeaneffectiveretrofitmeasure.Theinfillandexistingcolumnsshouldbe
3 designedtosatisfyalltherequirementsfornewwallconstruction,includinganystrengthening
4 of the existing columns required by adding a concrete or steel jacket for strength and
5 increased confinement. The opening below a discontinuous structural wall should also be
6 permittedtobeinfilledwithsteelbracing.Thebracingmembersshouldbesizedtosatisfy
7 alldesignrequirements,andthecolumnsshouldbestrengthenedwithasteelorareinforced
8 concretejacket.
9 Alloftheaboveretrofitmeasuresrequireanevaluationofthewallfoundation,diaphragms,and
10 connectionsbetweenexistingstructuralelementsandanyelementsaddedforretrofitpurposes.
11
12 8PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURAL WALLS
13 8.1Types of Precast Structural Walls
14 Precast concrete structural walls shall consist of story-high or half-story-high precast wall
15 segments that are made continuous through the use of either mechanical connectors or
16 reinforcement splicing techniques with or without a cast-in-place connection strip. Connections
17 between precast segments shall be permitted along both the horizontal and vertical edges of a wall
18 segment.
19 The following types of precast structural walls are addressed in Chapter 8:
20 1. Effectively monolithic construction, defined as construction in which the
21 reinforcement connections are made to be stronger than the adjacent precast panels
22 so that the lateral load response of the precast wall system is comparable to that for
23 monolithic structural walls;

Page 119 of 217

1 2. Jointed construction, defined as construction in which inelastic action is permitted
2 to occur at the connections between precast panels; and
3 3. Tilt-up construction, defined as a special technique for precast wall construction
4 where there are vertical joints between adjacent panels and horizontal joints at the
5 foundation level, and where the roof or floor diaphragm connects with the tilt-up
6 panel.
7 8.1.1 Effectively Monolithic ConstructionFor this type of precast wall, the connections between
8 precast wall elements are designed and detailed to be stronger than the panels they connect. Precast
9 structural walls and wall segments of effectively monolithic construction shall be evaluated by the
10 criteria defined in Chapter 7.
11 C8.1.1 Effectively Monolithic ConstructionWhen the precast structural wall is subjected to
12 lateralloading,anyyieldingandinelasticbehaviorshouldtakeplaceinthepanelelementsaway
13 fromtheconnections.Ifthereinforcementdetailinginthepanelissimilartothatforcastinplace
14 structuralwalls,thentheinelasticresponseofaprecaststructuralwallshouldbesimilartothat
15 foracastinplacewall.
16 Modernbuildingcodespermittheuseofprecaststructuralwallconstructioninhighseismiczones
17 ifitsatisfiesthecriteriaforcastinplacestructuralwallconstruction.
18
19 8.1.2 Jointed ConstructionPrecast structural walls and wall segments of jointed construction
20 shall be evaluated by the criteria defined in Section 8.2.
Page 120 of 217

1 C8.1.2JointedConstructionFormostolderstructuresthatcontainprecaststructuralwalls,and
2 for some modern construction, inelastic activity can be expected in the connections between
3 precastwallpanelsduringseverelateralloading.Becausejointsbetweenprecastwallsinolder
4 buildingshaveoftenexhibitedbrittlebehaviorduringinelasticloadreversals,jointedconstruction
5 wasnotpermittedinhighseismiczones.Therefore,whereevaluatingolderbuildingsthatcontain
6 precast walls that are likely to respond as jointed construction, the permissible ductilities and
7 rotation capacities provided below, which are less than those given in Chapter 7, should be
8 reduced.
9 For some modern structures, precast structural walls have been constructed with special
10 connectorsthataredetailedtoexhibitductileresponseandenergyabsorptioncharacteristics.
11 Many of these connectors are proprietary, and only limited experimental evidence concerning
12 theirinelasticbehaviorisavailable.Althoughthistypeofconstructionisclearlysaferthanjointed
13 constructioninolderbuildings,theexperimentalevidenceisnotsufficienttopermittheuseofthe
14 sameductilityandrotationcapacitiesgivenforcastinplaceconstruction.Thus,thepermissible
15 valuesgiveninChapter5shouldbereduced.
16 Section9.6ofFEMA450(2004)providestestingcriteriathatcanbeusedtovalidatedesignvalues
17 consistentwiththehighestperformanceofmonolithicstructuralwallconstruction.
18
19 8.1.3 Tilt-Up ConstructionStructural walls and wall segments of tilt-up type of precast walls
20 shall be evaluated by the criteria defined in Section 8.2.
21
Page 121 of 217

1 8.1.3 TiltUp ConstructionTiltup construction should be considered to be a special case of
2 jointedconstruction.Thewallsformostbuildingsconstructedbythetiltupmethodarelonger
3 than their height. Shear would usually govern their inplane design, except where there are
4 significant openings in the wall panels, for example, door openings at loading dock areas of
5 warehouses.Themajorconcernformosttiltupconstructionistheconnectionbetweenthetilt
6 up wall and the roof diaphragm. That connection should be analyzed carefully to be sure the
7 diaphragmforcescanbetransmittedsafelytotheprecastwallsystem.
9 8.2Precast Concrete Structural Walls and Wall Segments
10 8.2.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a precast concrete structural wall or wall segment shall
11 represent the stiffness, strength, and deformation capacity of the overall member, as well as the
12 connections and joints between any precast panel components that compose the wall. Potential
13 failure in flexure, shear, and reinforcement development at any point in the wall panels or
14 connections shall be considered. Interaction with other structural and nonstructural components
15 shall be included.
16 Modeling of precast concrete structural walls and wall segments within the precast panels as
17 equivalent frame elements that include both flexural and shear deformations shall be permitted.
18 The rigid-connection zone at beam connections to these equivalent frame elements shall represent
19 the distance from the wall centroid to the edge of the wall or wall segment. The different bending
20 capacities for the two loading directions of unsymmetrical precast wall sections shall be modeled.
21 For precast structural walls and wall segments where shear deformations have a more significant
22 effect on behavior than flexural deformation, a multiple spring model shall be used.
Page 122 of 217

1 The diaphragm action of concrete slabs connecting precast structural walls and frame columns
2 shall be represented in the model.
3 8.2.2 Stiffness of Precast Concrete Structural Walls and Wall SegmentsThe modeling
4 assumptions defined in Section 7.2.2 for monolithic concrete structural walls and wall segments
5 shall also be used for precast concrete walls. In addition, the analytical model shall model the axial,
6 shear, and rotational deformations of the connections between the precast components that
7 compose the wall by either softening the model used to represent the precast panels or by adding
8 spring elements between panels.
9 8.2.2.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresThe modeling procedures given in Section
10 7.2.2.1, combined with a procedure for including connection deformations as noted above, shall
11 be used.
12 8.2.2.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations shall comply with the
13 requirements of Section 3.1.2. The monotonic load-deformation relationships for analytical
14 models that represent precast structural walls and wall segments within precast panels shall be in
15 accordance with the generalized relation shown in Fig. 1, except that alternative approaches shall
16 be permitted where verified by experiments. Where the relations are according to Fig. 1, the
17 following approach shall be permitted.
18 Values for plastic hinge rotations or drifts at points B, C, and E for the two general shapes shall be
19 as defined below. The strength levels at points B and C shall correspond to the yield strength and
20 expected flexural strength or lower-bound flexural strength, as is appropriate in accordance with
21 Section 7.2.3. The residual strength for the line segment DE shall be as defined below.
22 For precast structural walls and wall segments whose inelastic behavior under lateral loading is
23 governed by flexure, the general load-deformation relationship shall be defined as in Fig. 1(a). For
Page 123 of 217

1 these members, the x-axis of Fig. 1(a) shall be taken as the rotation over the plastic hinging region
2 at the end of the member, as shown in Fig. 2. If the requirements for effectively monolithic
3 construction are satisfied, the value of the hinge rotation at point B shall correspond to the yield
4 rotation, y, and shall be calculated by Eq. 5. The same expression shall also be used for wall
5 segments within a precast panel if flexure controls the inelastic response of the segment. If the
6 precast wall is of jointed construction and flexure governs the inelastic response of the member,
7 then the value of y shall be increased to account for rotation in the joints between panels or
8 between the panel and the foundation.
9 For precast structural walls and wall segments whose inelastic behavior under lateral loading is
10 governed by shear, the general load-deformation relationship shall be defined as in Fig. 1(b). For
11 these members, the x-axis of Fig. 1(b) shall be taken as the story drift for structural walls and as
12 the element drift for wall segments, as shown in Fig. 3.
13 For effectively monolithic construction, the values for the variables anl, bnl, and cnl, required to
14 define the location of points C, D, and E in Fig. 1(a), shall be as specified in Table 19. For
15 construction classified as jointed construction, the values of anl, bnl, and cnl specified in Table 19
16 shall be reduced to 50% of the given values, unless experimental evidence is available to justify
17 higher values. In no case, however, shall values larger than those specified in Table 19 be used.
18 For effectively monolithic construction, values for the variables dnl, enl, and cnl, required to find
19 the points C, D, and E in Fig. 1(b), shall be as specified in Table 20 for the appropriate member
20 conditions. For construction classified as jointed construction, the values of dnl, enl, and cnl
21 specified in Table 20 shall be reduced to 50% of the specified values unless experimental evidence
22 is available to justify higher values. In no case, however, shall values larger than those specified
23 in Table 20 be used.
Page 124 of 217

1 For Tables 19 and 20, linear interpolation between tabulated values shall be permitted if the
2 member under analysis has conditions that are between the limits given in the tables.
5 by experimental evidence. The generalized relation shown in Fig. 1 shall be taken to represent the
6 envelope for the analysis. The unloading and reloading stiffnesses and strengths, and any pinching
7 of the load versus rotation hysteresis loops, shall reflect the behavior experimentally observed for
8 wall elements similar to the one under investigation.
9 8.2.3 Strength of Precast Concrete Structural Walls and Wall SegmentsThe strength of precast
10 concrete structural walls and wall segments within the panels shall be computed according to the
11 general requirement of Section 3.2, except as modified here. For effectively monolithic
12 construction, the strength calculation procedures given in Section 7.2.3 shall be followed.
13 For jointed construction, calculations of axial, shear, and flexural strength of the connections
14 between panels shall be based on fundamental principles of structural mechanics. Expected yield
15 strength for steel reinforcement of connection hardware used in the connections shall be used
16 where calculating the axial and flexural strength of the connection region. The unmodified
17 specified yield strength of the reinforcement and connection hardware shall be used where
18 calculating the shear strength of the connection region.
19 For all precast concrete structural walls of jointed construction, no difference shall be taken
20 between the computed yield and nominal strengths in flexure and shear. The values for strength
21 represented by the points B and C in Fig. 1 shall be computed following the procedures given in
22 Section 7.2.3.
23
Page 125 of 217

1 C8.2.3StrengthofPrecastConcreteStructuralWallsandWallSegmentsInolderconstruction,
2 particular attention must be given to the technique used for splicing reinforcement extending
3 fromadjacentpanelsintotheconnection.Theseconnectionscanbeinsufficientandoftencan
4 governthestrengthoftheprecastshearwallsystem.
6 8.2.4 Acceptance Criteria for Precast Concrete Structural Walls and Wall SegmentsThe
7 acceptance criteria for precast concrete structural walls shall be per Section 8.2.4.1 or 8.2.4.2 or
8 by other approved methods.
10 C8.2.4 Acceptance Criteria for Precast Concrete Structural Walls and Wall SegmentsThe
11 proceduresoutlinedinSection9.6ofFEMA450(2004)canbeusedtoestablishacceptancecriteria
12 forprecaststructuralwalls.
13
14 8.2.4.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresFor precast wall construction that is effectively
15 monolithic and for wall segments within a precast panel, the acceptance criteria defined in Section
16 7.2.4.1 shall be followed. For precast wall construction defined as jointed construction, the
17 acceptance criteria procedure given in Section 7.2.4.1 shall be followed; however, the m-factors
18 specified in Tables 21 and 22 shall be reduced by 50%, unless experimental evidence justifies the
19 use of a larger value. An m-factor need not be taken as less than 1.0 and in no case shall be taken
20 as larger than the values specified in these tables.
21 8.2.4.2 Nonlinear Static and Dynamic ProceduresInelastic response shall be restricted to those
22 structural walls (and wall segments) and actions listed in Tables 19 and 20, except where it is
23 demonstrated by experimental evidence and analysis that other inelastic action is acceptable for
Page 126 of 217

1 the selected Performance Levels. For components experiencing inelastic behavior, the magnitude
2 of the other actions (forces, moments, or torques) in the component shall correspond to the
3 magnitude of the action causing the inelastic behavior. The magnitude of these other actions shall
4 be shown to be below their nominal capacities.
5 For precast walls that are effectively monolithic and wall segments within a precast panel, the
6 maximum plastic hinge rotation angles or drifts during inelastic response shall not exceed the
7 values specified in Tables 19 and 20. For precast walls of jointed construction, the maximum
8 plastic hinge rotation angles or drifts during inelastic response shall not exceed one-half of the
9 values specified in Tables 19 and 20 unless experimental evidence justifies a higher value.
10 However, in no case shall deformation values larger than those specified in these tables be used
11 for jointed type construction.
12 Alternative approaches or values shall be permitted where justified by experimental evidence and
13 analysis.
14 8.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Precast Concrete Structural Walls and Wall SegmentsSeismic
15 retrofit measures for precast concrete structural walls and wall segments shall meet the
16 requirements of Section 3.7 and other provisions of this standard.
17
18 C8.2.5 Retrofit Measures for Precast Concrete Structural Walls and Wall SegmentsPrecast
19 concretestructuralwallsystemscansufferfromsomeofthesamedeficienciesascastinplace
20 walls. These deficiencies include inadequate flexural capacity, inadequate shear capacity with
21 respecttoflexuralcapacity,lackofconfinementatwallboundaryelements,andinadequatesplice
22 lengthsforlongitudinalreinforcementinwallboundaries.Afewdeficienciesuniquetoprecast
Page 127 of 217

1 wallconstructionareinadequateconnectionsbetweenpanels,tothefoundation,andtoflooror
2 roofdiaphragms.
3 The retrofit measures described in Section 7.2.5 can be effective in retrofitting precast
4 concretestructuralwalls.Inaddition,thefollowingretrofitmeasurescanbeeffective:
5 1. Enhancement of connections between adjacent or intersecting precast wall panels.
6 Mechanicalconnectorssuchassteelshapesandvarioustypesofdrilledinanchors,orcast
7 inplace strengthening methods, or a combination of the two, can be effective in
8 strengtheningconnectionsbetweenprecastpanels.Castinplacestrengtheningmethodscan
9 includeexposing thereinforcing steel at theedges of adjacent panels,adding vertical and
10 transverse(tie)reinforcement,andplacingnewconcrete.
11 2. Enhancement of connections between precast wall panels and foundations. Increasing the
12 shearcapacityofthewallpaneltofoundationconnectionbyusingsupplementalmechanical
13 connectorsorbyusingacastinplaceoverlaywithnewdowelsintothefoundationcanbean
14 effective retrofit measure. Increasing the overturning moment capacity of the panelto
15 foundationconnectionbyusingdrilledindowelswithinanewcastinplaceconnectionatthe
16 edgesofthepanelcanalsobeaneffectiveretrofitmeasure.Addingconnectionstoadjacent
17 panelscanalsobeaneffectiveretrofitmeasureineliminatingsomeoftheforcestransmitted
18 throughthepaneltofoundationconnection.
Page 128 of 217

1 3. Enhancementofconnectionsbetweenprecastwallpanelsandfloororroofdiaphragms.
2 Strengtheningtheseconnectionsbyusingeithersupplementalmechanicaldevicesorcastin
3 placeconnectorscanbeaneffectiveretrofitmeasure.Bothinplaneshearandoutofplane
4 forcesshouldbeconsideredwherestrengtheningtheseconnections.
5
6 9CONCRETE BRACED FRAMES
7 9.1Types of Concrete Braced Frames
8 Reinforced concrete-braced frames shall be defined as those frames with monolithic,
9 nonprestressed, reinforced concrete beams, columns, and diagonal braces that are coincident at
10 beamcolumn joints and that resist seismic forces primarily through truss action.
11 Where masonry infills are present in concrete-braced frames, requirements for masonry infilled
12 frames specified in Chapter 4 shall also apply.
13
14 9.2General
15 The analytical model for a reinforced concrete-braced frame shall represent the strength, stiffness,
16 and deformation capacity of beams, columns, braces, and all connections and components of the
17 frame. Potential failure in tension, compression (including instability), flexure, shear, anchorage,
18 and reinforcement development at any section along the component length shall be considered.
19 Interaction with other structural and nonstructural components shall be included.
20 The use of analytical models that represent the framing with line elements with properties
21 concentrated at component centerlines shall be permitted. Analytical models shall also comply
22 with the requirements specified in Section 4.2.1.
23 In frames that have braces only in some bays, the restraint of the brace shall be represented in
Page 129 of 217

1 the analytical model as specified above, and the nonbraced bays shall be modeled as frames in
2 compliance with the applicable provisions in other sections of this standard. Where braces create
3 a vertically discontinuous frame, the effects of the discontinuity on overall building performance
4 shall be considered.
5 Inelastic deformations in primary components shall be restricted to flexure and axial load in
6 beams, columns, and braces. Other inelastic deformations shall be permitted in secondary
7 components.
8
9 9.3Stiffness of Concrete Braced Frames

10 9.3.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProceduresModeling of beams, columns, and braces in braced
11 portions of the frame considering only axial tension and compression flexibilities shall be
12 permitted. Nonbraced portions of frames shall be modeled according to procedures described in
13 Chapters 4, 5, and 9 of this standard for frames. Effective stiffnesses shall be according to Section
14 3.1.2.
15 9.3.2 Nonlinear Static ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations shall comply with the
16 requirements of Section 3.1.2.
17 Beams, columns, and braces in braced portions shall be modeled using nonlinear truss
18 components or other models whose behavior has been demonstrated to adequately represent
19 behavior of concrete components dominated by axial tension and compression loading. Models
20 for beams and columns in nonbraced portions shall comply with requirements for frames specified
21 in Section 4.2.2.2. The model shall be capable of representing inelastic response along the
22 component lengths, as well as within connections.
23 Monotonic load-deformation relations shall be according to the generalized load-deformation
Page 130 of 217

1 relation shown in Fig. 1, except that different relations are permitted where verified by experiments.
2 The overall load-deformation relation shall be established so that the maximum resistance is
3 consistent with the strength specifications of Sections 3.2 and 4.2.3. Numerical quantities in Fig.
4 1 shall be derived from tests, rational analyses, or criteria of Section 16.2.2.2, with braces modeled
5 as columns in accordance with Table 17.
6 9.3.3 Nonlinear Dynamic ProcedureNonlinear load-deformation relations for use in analysis
8 by experimental evidence. Unloading and reloading properties shall represent stiffness and
9 strength degradation characteristics.
10
11 9.4Strength of Concrete Braced Frames

12 Component strengths shall be computed according to the general requirements of Sections 3.2 and
13 the additional requirements of Section 4.2.3. The possibility of instability of braces in compression
14 shall be considered.
15
16 9.5Acceptance Criteria for Concrete Braced Frames

17 9.5.1 Linear Static and Dynamic ProcedureAll actions shall be classified as being either
18 deformation controlled or force controlled, as defined in Section 7.5.1 of ASCE 41. In primary
19 components, deformation-controlled actions shall be restricted to flexure
20 and axial actions in beams and columns and also axial actions in braces. In secondary components,
21 deformation-controlled actions shall be restricted to those actions identified for the braced or
22 isolated frame in this standard.
23 Calculated component actions shall satisfy the requirements of Section 7.5.2.2 of ASCE 41. The
Page 131 of 217

1 m-factors for concrete frames shall be as specified in other applicable sections of this standard,
2 and m-factors for beams, columns, and braces modeled as tension and compression components
3 shall be as specified for columns in Table 18. The m-factors shall be reduced to half the values in
4 that table but need not be less than 1.0 where component buckling is a consideration. Alternate
5 approaches or values shall be permitted where justified by experimental evidence and analysis.
6 9.5.2 Nonlinear Static and Dynamic ProceduresCalculated component actions shall satisfy the
7 requirements of Section 7.5.2.2 of ASCE 41 and shall not exceed the numerical values listed in
8 Table 17 or the relevant tables for isolated frames specified in other sections of this standard.
9 Where inelastic action is indicated for a component or action not listed in these tables, the
10 performance shall be deemed unacceptable. Alternate approaches or values shall be permitted
11 where justified by experimental evidence and analysis.
12 9.6Retrofit Measures for Concrete Braced Frames
13 Seismic retrofit measures for concrete braced frame components shall meet the requirements of
14 Section 3.7 and other provisions of this standard.
15
16 C9.6 RetrofitMeasuresforConcreteBracedFramesRetrofitmeasuresthatcanbeeffectivein
17 retrofitted concrete braced frames include the general approaches listed for other concrete
18 elementsinthisstandardandASCE41,plusotherapproachesbasedonrationalprinciples.
19
20
21 10CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIAPHRAGMS

22 10.1 Components of Cast-in-Place Concrete Diaphragms
23
Page 132 of 217

1 Cast-in-place concrete diaphragms transmit inertial forces within a structure to vertical seismic-
2 force-resisting elements.
3 Concrete diaphragm systems shall be made up of slabs, struts, collectors, and chords.
4 Alternatively, diaphragm action is permitted to be provided by a structural truss in the horizontal
5 plane. Diaphragms consisting of structural concrete topping on metal deck shall comply with the
6 requirements of Section 9.8.2 of ASCE 41.
7 10.1.1 SlabsSlabs shall consist of cast-in-place concrete systems that, in addition to supporting
8 gravity loads, transmit inertial loads developed within the structure from one vertical seismic-
9 force-resisting element to another and provide out-of-plane bracing to other portions of the
10 building.
11 10.1.2 Struts and CollectorsCollectors are components that serve to transmit the inertial forces
12 within the diaphragm to elements of the seismic-force-resisting system. Struts are components of
13 a structural diaphragm used to provide continuity around an opening in the diaphragm. Struts and
14 collectors shall be monolithic with the slab, occurring either within the slab thickness or being
15 thicker than the slab.
16 10.1.3 Diaphragm ChordsDiaphragm chords are components along diaphragm or opening
17 edges with concentrated longitudinal and, in some cases, added transverse reinforcement, acting
18 primarily to resist tension and compression forces generated by bending in the diaphragm. Exterior
19 walls shall be permitted to serve as chords, provided that there is adequate strength to transfer
20 shear between the slab and the wall.
21
22 C10.1.3 DiaphragmChordsWhenevaluatinganexistingbuilding,specialcareshouldbetaken
23 toevaluatetheconditionofthelapsplices.Wherethesplicesarenotconfinedbycloselyspaced
Page 133 of 217

1 transversereinforcement,splicefailureispossibleifstresslevelsreachcriticalvalues.Inretrofit
2 construction,newlapsplicesshouldbeconfinedbycloselyspacedtransversereinforcement.
4 10.2 Analysis, Modeling, and Acceptance Criteria for Cast-in-Place Concrete Diaphragms
5 10.2.1 GeneralThe analytical model for a diaphragm shall represent the strength, stiffness, and
6 deformation capacity of each component and the diaphragm as a whole. Potential failure in flexure,
7 shear, buckling, and bond or anchorage of reinforcement shall be considered.
8 Modeling of the diaphragm as a continuous or simple span horizontal beam supported by
9 elements of varying stiffness shall be permitted. The beam shall be modeled as rigid, stiff, or
10 flexible considering the deformation characteristics of the actual system.
11
12 C10.2.1 GeneralComputer models are often based on the assumption that diaphragms are
13 rigid for motion in the plane of the diaphragm. Due to their thickness, most castinplace
14 diaphragmswouldbeconsideredtoberigidintheplaneofthediaphragm.Thinconcreteslabs
15 castovermetaldecksmightbeconsideredtoberigidorflexibleformotionintheplaneofthe
16 diaphragmdependingonthelengthtowidthratioofthediaphragm.
17
18 10.2.2 Stiffness of Cast-in-Place Concrete DiaphragmsDiaphragm stiffness shall be modeled

19 according to Section 10.2.1 and shall be determined using a linear elastic model and gross section
20 properties. The modulus of elasticity used shall be that of the concrete as specified in ACI 318.
21 Where the length-to-width ratio of the diaphragm exceeds 2.0 (where the length is the distance
22 between vertical elements), the effects of diaphragm flexibility shall be considered where
23 assigning lateral forces to the resisting vertical elements.
Page 134 of 217

1
2 C10.2.2 Stiffness of CastinPlace Concrete DiaphragmsThe concern is for relatively flexible
3 verticalmembersthatcanbedisplacedbythediaphragmandforrelativelystiffverticalmembers
4 thatcanbeoverloadedbythesamediaphragmdisplacement.
6 10.2.3 Strength of Cast-in-Place Concrete DiaphragmsStrength of cast-in-place concrete

7 diaphragm components shall comply with the requirements of Section 3.2 as modified in this
8 section.
9 The maximum component strength shall be determined considering potential failure in flexure,
10 axial load, shear, torsion, bond, anchorage, and other actions at all points in the component under
11 the actions of design gravity and lateral load combinations. The shear strength shall be calculated
12 as specified in ACI 318. Strut, collector, and chord strengths shall be as determined for frame
13 components in Section 4.2.3.
14 10.2.4 Acceptance Criteria for Cast-in-Place Concrete DiaphragmsDiaphragm shear and
15 flexure shall be considered deformation controlled. Acceptance criteria for slab component actions
16 shall be as specified for shear walls in Section 7.2.4, with m-factors taken according to similar
17 components in Tables 21 and 22 for use in Eq. (7-36) of ASCE 41. Acceptance criteria for struts,
18 chords, and collectors shall be as specified for frame components in Section 4.2.4. Connections
19 shall be considered force controlled.
20
21 10.3Retrofit Measures for Cast-in-Place Concrete Diaphragms

22 Seismic retrofit measures for cast-in-place concrete diaphragms shall meet the requirements of
23 Section 3.7 and other provisions of this standard and ASCE 41.
Page 135 of 217

1
2 C10.3RetrofitMeasuresforCastinPlaceConcreteDiaphragms
3 Twogeneralalternativesthatcanbeeffectiveinretrofittingcastinplaceconcretediaphragms
4 include the following: either improve the strength and ductility or reduce the demand in
5 accordancewithFEMA172(1992a).Providingadditionalreinforcementandencasementcanbe
6 aneffectivemeasuretostrengthenorimproveindividualcomponents.Increasingthediaphragm
7 thicknesscanalsobeeffective,buttheaddedweightcanoverloadthefootingsandincreasethe
8 seismicloads.Loweringseismicdemandbyprovidingadditionalseismicforceresistingelements,
9 introducingadditionaldamping,orisolatingthebaseofthestructurecanalsobeeffectiveretrofit
10 measures.
11
12 11PRECAST CONCRETE DIAPHRAGMS
13 11.1Components of Precast Concrete Diaphragms
14 Precast concrete diaphragms are elements made up of primarily precast components with or
15 without topping that transmit shear forces from within a structure to vertical seismic-force-
16 resisting elements.
17 Precast concrete diaphragms shall be classified as topped or untopped. A topped diaphragm shall
18 be defined as one that includes a reinforced structural concrete topping slab poured over the
19 completed precast horizontal system. An untopped diaphragm shall be defined as one constructed
20 of precast components without a structural cast-in-place topping.
21
22 C11.1Components of Precast Concrete Diaphragms

23 Chaper11 provided a general overview of concrete diaphragms. Components of precast concrete
Page 136 of 217

1 diaphragms are similar in nature and function to those of cast-in-place diaphragms with a few
2 critical differences. One difference is that precast diaphragms do not possess the inherent unity of
3 cast-in-place monolithic construction. Additionally, precast components can be highly stressed
4 because of prestressed forces. These forces cause long-term shrinkage and creep, which shorten
5 the component over time. This shortening tends to fracture connections that restrain the component.
6 Most floor systems have a topping system, but some hollow-core floor systems do not. The
7 topping slab generally bonds to the top of the precast components, but it can have an inadequate
8 thickness at the center of the span or can be inadequately reinforced to effectively resist seismic
9 forces. Also, extensive cracking of joints can be present along the panel joints. Shear transfer at
10 the edges of precast concrete diaphragms is especially critical.
11 Some precast roof systems are constructed as untopped systems. Untopped precast concrete
12 diaphragms have been limited to areas of lower seismic hazard by recent versions of ASCE 7. This
13 limitation has been imposed because of the brittleness of connections and lack of test data
14 concerning the various precast systems. Special consideration shall be given to diaphragm chords
15 in precast construction.
16
17 11.2Analysis, Modeling, and Acceptance Criteria for Precast Concrete Diaphragms

18 Analysis and modeling of precast concrete diaphragms shall conform to Section 10.2.2, with the
19 added requirement that the analysis and modeling shall account for the segmental nature of the
20 individual components.
21 Component strengths shall be determined in accordance with Section 10.2.3. Welded connection
22 strength shall be based on rational procedures, and connections shall be assumed to have little
23 ductility capacity unless test data verify higher ductility values. Precast concrete diaphragms with
Page 137 of 217

1 reinforced concrete topping slabs shall be considered deformation controlled in shear and flexure.
2 m-factors shall be taken as 1.0, 1.25, and 1.5 for IO, LS, and CP Performance Levels, respectively.
3 Untopped precast concrete diaphragms shall be considered force controlled.
4
5 C11.2Analysis,Modeling,andAcceptanceCriteriaforPrecastConcreteDiaphragms
6 WeldedconnectionstrengthcanbedeterminedusingthelatestversionofthePrecastConcrete
7 Institute(PCI)DesignHandbook(2010).Adiscussionofdesignprovisionsforuntoppedprecast
8 diaphragmscanbefoundintheappendixtoChapter9ofFEMA368(2001).
9 TheappendixtoChapter9ofFEMA450(2004)providesdiscussionofthebehaviorofuntopped
10 precast diaphragms and outlines a design approach that can be used for such diaphragms to
11 satisfytherequirementsofthisstandard.
12
13 11.3Retrofit Measures for Precast Concrete Diaphragms

14 Seismic retrofit measures for precast concrete diaphragms shall meet the requirements of Section
15 3.7 and other provisions of this standard.
16
17 C11.3RetrofitMeasuresforPrecastConcreteDiaphragms
18 Section10.3providesguidanceforretrofitmeasuresforconcretediaphragmsingeneral.Special
19 careshouldbetakentoovercomethesegmentalnatureofprecastconcretediaphragmsandto
20 avoiddamagingprestressingstrandswhenaddingconnections.
21
22 12CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS
Page 138 of 217

1 12.1Types of Concrete Foundations
2 Foundations shall be defined as those components of a building that serve to transmit loads from
3 the vertical structural subsystems, such as columns and walls, to the supporting soil or rock.
4 Concrete foundations for buildings shall be classified as either shallow or deep foundations as
5 defined in Chapter 8 of ASCE 41. Requirements of Chapter 12 shall apply to shallow foundations
6 that include spread or isolated footing, strip or line footing, combination footing, and concrete mat
7 footing and to deep foundations that include pile foundations and cast-in-place piers. Concrete
8 grade beams shall be permitted in both shallow and deep foundation systems and shall comply
9 with the requirements of Chapter 12.
10 12.1.1 Shallow Concrete FoundationsExisting spread footings, strip footings, and combination
11 footings are reinforced or unreinforced. Vertical loads are transmitted by these footings to the soil
12 by direct bearing; seismic forces are transmitted by a combination of friction between the bottom
13 of the footing and the soil, and passive pressure of the soil on the vertical face of the footing.
14 Concrete mat footings are reinforced to resist the flexural and shear stresses resulting from the
15 superimposed concentrated and line structural loads and the distributed resisting soil pressure
16 under the footing. Seismic forces are resisted by friction between the soil and the bottom of the
17 footing and by passive pressure developed against foundation walls that are part of the system.
18 12.1.2 Deep Concrete Foundations
19 12.1.2.1 Driven Concrete Pile FoundationsConcrete pile foundations shall be composed of a
20 reinforced concrete pile cap supported on driven piles. The piles shall be concrete (with or without
21 prestressing), steel shapes, steel pipes, or composite (concrete in a driven steel shell). Vertical
22 loads are transmitted to the piles by the pile cap. Pile foundation resistance to vertical loads shall
23 be calculated based on the direct bearing of the pile tip in the soil, the skin friction or cohesion of
Page 139 of 217

1 the soil on the surface area of the pile, or based on a combination of these mechanisms. Seismic-
2 force resistance shall be calculated based on passive pressure of the soil on the vertical face of the
3 pile cap, in combination with interaction of the piles in bending and passive soil pressure on the
4 pile surface.
5
6 C12.1.2.1 Driven Concrete Pile FoundationsIn poor soils, or soils subject to liquefaction,
7 bendingofthepilescanbetheonlydependableresistancetoseismicforces.
9 12.1.2.2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Pile FoundationsCast-in-place concrete pile foundations shall

10 consist of reinforced concrete placed in a drilled or excavated shaft. Cast-in-place pile foundation
11 resistance to vertical and seismic forces shall be calculated in the same manner as that of driven
12 pile foundations specified in Section 12.1.2.1.
13
14 C12.1.2.2 CastinPlace Concrete Pile FoundationsSegmented steel cylindrical liners are
15 availabletoformtheshaftinweaksoilsandallowthelinertoberemovedastheconcreteis
16 placed.Variousslurrymixesareoftenusedtoprotectthedrilledshaftfromcavingsoils.Theslurry
17 isthendisplacedastheconcreteisplacedbythetremiemethod.
18
19 12.2Analysis of Existing Concrete Foundations

20 For concrete buildings, it is permitted to consider components fixed against rotation and translation
21 at the top of the foundation if the connections between components and foundations, the
22 foundations, and supporting soil are shown to be capable of resisting the induced forces and the
23 foundation is rotationally stiff relative to the component stiffness. Where components or
Page 140 of 217

1 foundations are not designed to resist flexural moments, or the connections between components
2 and foundations are not capable of resisting the induced moments, it is permitted to model the
3 components with pinned ends at the top of the foundation. In such cases, the component base shall
4 be evaluated for the ability to accommodate the necessary end rotation of the component. The
5 effects of base stiffness of components shall be taken into account at the point of maximum
6 displacement of the superstructure.
7 If fixed or pinned boundary conditions cannot be justified, a more rigorous analysis procedure
8 shall be used. Appropriate vertical, lateral, and rotational soil springs shall be incorporated in the
9 analytical model as described in Section 8.4 of ASCE 41. The spring characteristics shall be as
10 specified in Chapter 8 of ASCE 41. Rigorous analysis of structures with deep foundations in soft
11 soils shall be based on special soilpile interaction studies to determine the probable location of
12 the point of fixity in the foundation and the resulting distribution of forces and displacements in
13 the superstructure. In these analyses, the appropriate representation of the connection of the pile
14 to the pile cap shall be included in the model. Piles with less than 6 in. of embedment without any
15 dowels into the pile cap shall be modeled as being pinned to the cap. Unless the pile and pile
16 cap connection detail is identified as otherwise from the available construction documents, the
17 pinned connection shall be used in the analytical model.
18 Where the foundations are included in the analytical model, the responses of the foundation
19 components shall be considered. The reactions of structural components attached at the foundation
20 (axial loads, shears, and moments) shall be used to evaluate the individual components of the
21 foundation system.
22
23 C12.2Analysis of Existing Concrete Foundations
Page 141 of 217

1 Engineering judgement should be practiced when modeling the effects of the foundation
2 elements. The determination of the appropriate boundary condition to be used can often be quickly
3 performed by comparing the relative strengths and stiffness of the superstructure component with
4 the foundation element. For example, the base of a column can typically be modeled as fixed when
5 it connects to a mat or pile foundation; similarly, the ends of a concrete shear wall can typically be
6 modeled as pinned when connecting to shallow foundations. The engineer is permitted to use
7 simple boundary conditions (i.e., fixed or pinned) when they can be justified. A more rigorous
8 approach is required when a simple approach cannot be justified. In lieu of a more rigorous analysis
9 approach, the engineer may also consider bounding the analysis by utilizing both a fixed
10 boundary condition analysis approach and a pinned boundary condition analysis approach.
11
12
13 12.3Evaluation of Existing Condition
14 Allowable soil capacities (subgrade modulus, bearing pressure, and passive pressure) and
15 foundation displacements for the selected performance level shall be as prescribed in Chapter 8 of
16 ASCE 41 or as established with project-specific data. All components of existing foundation
17 systems and all new material, components, or components required for retrofit shall be evaluated
18 as force-controlled actions. However, the capacity of the foundation components need not exceed
19 1.25 times the capacity of the supported vertical structural component or element (column or wall).
20
21 12.4Retrofit Measures for Concrete Foundations

22 Seismic retrofit measures for concrete foundations shall meet the requirements of Section 3.7 and
23 other provisions of this standard.
Page 142 of 217

1
2 C12.4RetrofitMeasuresforConcreteFoundations
3 Themeasuresdescribedinthissectioncanbeeffectiveinretrofittingexistingshallowanddeep
4 foundations.
5 Forshallowconcretefoundations:
6 1. Enlargingtheexistingfootingbylateraladditions.Enlargingtheexistingfootingcanbe
7 aneffectiveretrofitmeasure.Theenlargedfootingcanbeconsideredtoresistsubsequent
8 actionsproducedbythedesignloads,providedthatadequateshearandmomenttransfer
9 capacityareprovidedacrossthejointbetweentheexistingfootingandtheadditions.
10 2. Underpinning the footing. Underpinning an existing footing involves the removal of
11 unsuitablesoilunderneath,coupledwithreplacementusingconcrete,soilcement,suitable
12 soil, or other material. Underpinning should be staged in small increments to prevent
13 endangeringthestabilityofthestructure.Thistechniquecanbeusedtoenlargeanexisting
14 footingortoextendittoamorecompetentsoilstratum.
15 3. Providing tension tiedowns. Tension ties (soil and rock anchors, prestressed and
16 unstressed) can be drilled and grouted into competent soils and anchored in the existing
17 footing to resist uplift. Increased soilbearing pressures produced by the ties should be
18 checked against the acceptance criteria for the selected performance level specified in
19 Chapter8ofASCE41.Pilesordrilledpierscanalsobeeffectiveinprovidingtensiontiedowns
20 ofexistingfootings.
21 4. Increasing effective depth of footing. This method involves pouring new concrete to
22 increase shear and moment capacity of the existing footing. The new concrete must be
Page 143 of 217

1 adequatelydoweledorotherwiseconnectedsothatitisintegralwiththeexistingfooting.
2 Newhorizontalreinforcementshouldbeprovided,ifrequired,toresistincreasedmoments.
3 5. Increasingtheeffectivedepthofaconcretematfoundationwithareinforcedconcrete
4 overlay. This method involves pouring an integral topping slab over the existing mat to
5 increaseshearandmomentcapacity.
6 6. Providingpilesupportsforconcretefootingsormatfoundations.Addingnewpilescan
7 beeffectiveinprovidingsupportforexistingconcretefootingormatfoundations,provided
8 that the pile locations and spacing are designed to avoid overstressing the existing
9 foundations.
10 7. Changingthebuildingstructuretoreducethedemandontheexistingelements.This
11 method involves removing mass or height of the building or adding other materials or
12 components(suchasenergydissipationdevices)toreducetheloadtransferatthebaselevel.
13 Newshearwallsorbracescanbeprovidedtoreducethedemandonexistingfoundations.
14 8. Adding new grade beams. This approach involves the addition of grade beams to tie
15 existingfootingstogetherwherepoorsoilexists,toprovidefixitytocolumnbases,andto
16 distributeseismicforcesbetweenindividualfootings,pilecaps,orfoundationwalls.
17 9. Improvingexistingsoil.Thisapproachinvolvesgroutingtechniquestoimproveexisting
18 soil.
19 Fordeepfoundations:
20 1. Providing additional piles or piers. Providing additional piles or piers can be effective,
21 providedthatextensionandadditionalreinforcementofexistingpilecapsfollowguidance
22 providedforretrofitmeasuresofshallowfoundationsprovidedabove.
Page 144 of 217

1 2. Increasingtheeffectivedepthofthepilecap.Newconcreteandreinforcementaddedto
2 thetopofthepilecapcanbeeffectiveinincreasingitsshearandmomentcapacity,provided
3 thattheinterfaceisdesignedtotransferactionsbetweentheexistingandnewmaterials.
4 3. Improvingsoiladjacenttotheexistingpilecap.Soilimprovementadjacenttoexisting
5 pilecapscanbeeffectiveifundertakeninaccordancewithguidanceprovidedinSection8.3
6 ofASCE41.
7 4. Increasingpassivepressurebearingareaofpilecap.Additionofnewreinforcedconcrete
8 extensions to the existing pile cap can be effective in increasing the vertical foundation
9 bearingareaandloadresistance.
10 5. Changing the building system to reduce the demands on the existing elements. New
11 lateralloadresistingelementscanbeeffectiveinreducingdemand.
12 6. Addingbatterpilesorpiers.Addingbatterpilesorpierstoexistingpileorpierfoundations
13 canbeeffectiveinresistingseismicforces.Itshouldbenotedthatbatterpileshaveperformed
14 poorlyinrecentearthquakeswhereliquefiablesoilswerepresent.Thisproblemisespecially
15 importanttoconsideraroundwharfstructuresandinareasthathaveahighwatertable.
16 Addition of batter piles to foundations in areas of such seismic hazards should be in
17 accordancewithrequirementsinSection8.4ofASCE41.
18 7. Increasingtensiontiecapacityfrompileorpiertosuperstructure.Addedreinforcement
19 shouldsatisfytherequirementsofChapter3.
20
21 CHAPTER 13 - NOTATION AND DEFINITIONS
Page 145 of 217

1 13.1Notation
2 Acv = gross area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of section
3 in the direction of shear force considered in the case of walls, and gross area of
4 concrete section in the case of diaphragms, not to exceed the thickness times the
5 width of the diaphragm,, Section C7.2.3, in.2
6 Ag = Gross area of column, in.2
7 Aj = Effective cross-sectional area of a beamcolumn joint, in a plane parallel to the
8 plane of reinforcement generating shear in the joint, in.2
9 As = Area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, in.2
10 As = Total area of longitudinal reinforcement in a section, in.2
11 As = Area of compression reinforcement, in.2
12 Av = Area of shear reinforcement, in.2

13 Aw = Area of the web cross section, = bwd, in.2
14 DCR = Demand-capacity ratio, computed in accordance with Eq. (7-16) in ASCE 41
15 E = Youngs modulus of elasticity, psi
16 EcE = Modulus of elasticity of concrete; evaluated using expected material properties,
17 psi
18 (EI)eff = Effective flexural rigidity of a section, in.2-lb
19 Es = Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, psi
20 Fpe = Effective prestressing force of a prestressing tendon, in.2
21 I = Moment of inertia, in.4
22 Ig = Moment of inertia of gross concrete or masonry section about centroidal axis,
23 neglecting reinforcement, in.4
Page 146 of 217

1 KR = Stiffness of rotational spring used to explicitly capture bar slip, in.-lb/rad
2 L = Length of member along which deformations are assumed to occur, in.
3 MfyE = Moment at section at first yield, defined as the moment at which the yield strain
4 of the reinforcing steel is first reached in tension, or a concrete strain of 0.002 is
5 reached in compression; evaluated using expected material properties, in.-lb
6 MUD = Member design moment evaluated based on Eq. (7-34) of ASCE 41, in.-lb
7 MgUD,CS = Moment caused by gravity loads acting on the slab column strip; to be
8 calculated according to the procedures of ACI 318 for the gravity loads
9 specified in Section 7.2.2 of ASCE 41, in.-lb
10 MBE = Moment strength at beam section; evaluated using expected material properties
11 MCoE = Moment strength at column section; evaluated using expected material
12 properties, in.-lb
13 MSCSE = Moment strength of the slab column strip; evaluated using expected material
14 properties, in.-lb
15 MSE = Positive or negative flexural strengths of a section of slab between lines that are
16 two and one-half slab or drop panel thicknesses outside opposite faces of the
17 column or capital, in.-lb
18 MUDx = Design bending moment about the x-axis for axial load PUF, in.-lb
19 MUDy = Design bending moment about the y-axis for axial load PUF, in.-lb
20 MyE = Moment strength at section; evaluated per ACI 318 without strength reduction
21 factors and using expected material properties, or using Eq. C10, in.-lb
22 NUD = Member design axial force evaluated based on Eq. (7-34) of ASCE 41, lb
23 NUG = Member design axial force evaluated based on Eq. (7-3) of ASCE 41; set to zero
Page 147 of 217

1 for tension force in Eq. (3), lb
2 Pc = Lower-bound of vertical compressive strength for wall or wall pier, lb
3 PCE = Expected gravity compressive force applied to a wall or pier component stress,
4 lb
5 PCL = Lower-bound axial strength of a column, wall, or wall pier, lb
6 P0 = Nominal axial load strength at zero eccentricity, lb
7 PUD = Deformation-controlled axial force evaluated per ASCE 41 Section 7.5.2 , lb
8 PUF = Force-controlled axial force evaluated per ASCE 41 Section 7.5.2 , lb
9 Q = Generalized force in a component, Fig. 1
10 QCE = Expected strength of a deformation controlled action of an element at the
11 deformation level under consideration
12 QCL = Lower-bound estimate of the strength of a force-controlled action of an element
13 at the deformation level under consideration
14 QUD = Deformation-controlled action caused by gravity loads and earthquake forces
15 QUF = Force-controlled action caused by gravity loads and earthquake forces
16 Qy = Yield strength of a component, Fig. 1
17 Q y = Substitute yield strength
18 V = Shear force at section concurrent with moment, M, lb

19 VCol = Shear strength of concrete columns, Eq. (3); evaluated using lower-bound or
20 expected material properties as applicable to force-controlled or deformation-
21 controlled actions, respectively, lb
22 VCPunE = Punching shear strength provided by the concrete as defined in ACI 318;
23 evaluated using expected material properties, lb
Page 148 of 217

1 VJ = Beam-column joint shear strength calculated using the general procedures of
2 ACI 318, as modified by Eq. (4) , lb
3 VCol0 = Shear strength of concrete columns at a displacement ductility demand not
4 exceeding 2.0, Eq. (3); evaluated using lower-bound or expected material
5 properties as applicable to force-controlled or deformation-controlled actions,
6 respectively, lb
7 VCol0E = Shear strength of concrete columns at a displacement ductility demand not
8 exceeding 2.0, Eq. (3); evaluated using expected material properties, lb
9 Vs = Shear strength provided by shear reinforcement, lb
10 VyE = Shear demand resulting in flexural yielding of the plastic hinges; evaluated
11 using a longitudinal steel stress of fylE, lb
12 VUD = Member design shear force evaluated based on Eq. (7-34) of ASCE 41, lb
13 anl = Parameter used to measure deformation capacity in component load
14 deformation curves, Fig. 1; same as a in ASCE 41
15 b = Section width, in.
16 bn = Parameter used to measure deformation capacity in component load
17 deformation curves, Fig. 1; same as b in ASCE 41
18 beff = Effective width of slab when using an effective beam width model, in.
19 bw = Web width, in.
20 cn = Parameter used to measure residual strength; same as c in ASCE 41
21 c1 = Size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket
22 measured in the direction of the span for which moments are being determined,
23 in.
Page 149 of 217

1 c2 = Size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket
2 measured in perpendicular to the direction of the span for which moments are
3 being determined, in.
4 d = Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension reinforcement,
5 in.; it shall be permitted to assume that d = 0.8h, where h is the dimension of the
6 column in the direction of shear, in.
7 db = Nominal diameter of reinforcing bar, in.
8 dc = Column core depth measured out-to-out of ties, in.
9 dn = Parameter used to measure deformation capacity, Fig. 1; same as d in ASCE 41
10 en = Parameter used to measure deformation capacity, Fig. 1; same as e in ASCE 41
11 fn = Parameter used to measure deformation capacity, Fig. 1; same as f in ASCE 41
12 fc = Specified compressive strength of concrete, psi
13 fcL/E = Lower-bound or expected concrete comprehensive strength, as applicable to
14 force-controlled or deformation-controlled actions, respectively, psi
15 fcE = Expected compressive strength of concrete, psi
16 fcL = Lower-bound compressive strength of concrete, psi
17 fpc = Average compressive stress in concrete caused by effective prestress force only,
18 after allowance for all prestress losses, psi
19 fs = Maximum stress that can be developed in anchored or spliced reinforcement,
20 lb/in.2, Eq. (1a), psi
21 fs-deg = Maximum stress that can be developed in anchored or spliced reinforcement
22 after inelastic deformations or damage reduce the effective anchorage length to
23 lb-deg, lb/in.2, Eq. (1b), psi
Page 150 of 217

1 fy = Specified yield strength for nonprestressed reinforcement, psi
2 fyL/E = Lower-bound or expected yield strength of reinforcement, as applicable to
3 force-controlled or deformation-controlled actions, respectively, psi
4 fyE = Expected yield strength of reinforcing steel, psi
5 fyL = Lower-bound yield strength of reinforcing steel, psi
6 fy = Specified yield strength of longitudinal reinforcing steel, psi
7 fyL/E = Lower-bound or expected yield strength of longitudinal reinforcement, as
8 applicable to force-controlled or deformation-controlled actions, respectively,
9 psi
10 fyE = Lower-bound yield strength of longitudinal reinforcing steel, psi
11 fyL = Lower-bound yield strength of longitudinal reinforcing steel, psi
12 fyt = Specified yield strength of transverse reinforcement, psi
13 fytL/E = Lower-bound or expected yield strength of transverse reinforcement, as
14 applicable to force-controlled or deformation-controlled actions, respectively, psi
15 fytE = Expected yield strength of transverse reinforcement, psi
16 fytL = Lower-bound yield strength of transverse reinforcement, psi
17 gn = Parameter used to measure deformation capacity, Fig. 1; same as g in ASCE 41
18 h = Height of member along which deformations are measured Overall thickness of
19 member, in.
20 = Shear wall height, in.
21 hc = Gross cross-sectional dimension of column core measured in the direction of
22 joint shear, in.
23 h1 = Effective height over which bond slip is distributed, taken as the clear height of
Page 151 of 217

1 the wall at the story directly above the anchorage interface
2 kn = Coefficient used for calculation of column shear strength based on displacement
3 ductility, Eq. (3). kn = 1.0 in regions where displacement ductility demand is
4 less than or equal to 2, 0.7 in regions where displacement ductility demand is
5 greater than or equal to 6, and varies linearly for displacement ductility between
6 2 and 6
7 1 = Length of slab span in a slab-column in the direction of seismic forces, in.
8 2 = Length of slab span in a slab-column in the direction perpendicular to the
9 seismic forces, in.
10 b = Available length of straight development, lap splice, or standard hook, in., Eq.
11 (1a), in.
12 b-deg = Adjusted available straight development, or lap splice length for column bars
13 passing through regions where inelastic deformations and damage are expected,
14 in., Eq. (1b). b-deg shall be evaluated by subtracting from b a distance of 2/3d
15 from the point of maximum flexural demand in any direction damage is
16 anticipated within the column; with d calculated in the direction of the largest
17 cross-sectional dimension., in.
18 d = Required length of development for a straight bar, splice, or hook, evaluated in
19 accordance with ACI 318, in., Eqs. (1a) and (1b)
20 e = Length of embedment of reinforcement, in., Eq. (2)
21 p = Length of plastic hinge used for calculation of inelastic deformation capacity,
22 in., Eq. (5)
23 w = Length of entire wall or a segment of wall considered in the direction of shear
Page 152 of 217

1 force, in
2 m = Component demand modification factor to account for expected ductility
3 associated with this action at the selected Structural Performance Level.
4 mx = Value of m for bending about the x-axis of a member
5 my = Value of m for bending about the y-axis of a member,
6 np = Number of prestressed strands
7 s = Spacing of shear reinforcement, Eqs. (3) and (C1), in.
8 tw = Thickness of wall web, in.
9 vy = Shear at yield in the direction under consideration in lb/ft,
10 = Calculated deflection of diaphragm, wall, or bracing element; or generalized
11 deformation, Fig. 1
12 Col = Dimensionless parameter for evaluating the effectiveness of transverse
13 reinforcement in resisting shear forces in Eq. (3); Col = 1.0 for s/d 0.75, 0.0
14 for s/d 1.0, and varies linearly for s/d between 0.75 and 1.0
15 eff = Effective stiffness factor for cracked section of a slab modeled using an
16 effective beam width model, Eq. (C3)
17 = Coefficient for calculation of joint shear strength, Eq. (4)
18 f = Fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slabcolumn
19 connections
20 = Generalized deformation, radians, Fig. 1
21 b = Angle between lower edge of compressive strut and beam, radians
22 c = Angle between lower edge of compressive strut and column, radians
23 yE = Yield rotation, radians, Eq. (5); evaluated using expected material properties
Page 153 of 217

1 = A knowledge factor used to reduce component strength based on the level of
2 knowledge obtained for individual components during data collection
3 = Correction factor related to unit weight of concrete, Eqs. (3) and (4)
4 = Coefficient of shear friction
5 = Ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement to effective section area = As / bd
6 ba = Reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain conditions
7 l = Ratio of area of distributed longitudinal reinforcement to gross concrete area
8 perpendicular to that reinforcement
9 t = Ratio of area of distributed transverse reinforcement to gross concrete area
10 perpendicular to that reinforcement = Av / (bd)
11 v = Vertical reinforcement ratio in a wall or wall pier
12 w = Ratio of As to bwd
13 = Ratio of nonprestressed compression reinforcement
14 = Volumetric ratio of horizontal confinement reinforcement in a joint
15 = Strength reduction factor
16 fyE = Curvature at section at first yield, defined as the curvature at which the yield
17 strain of the reinforcing steel is first reached in tension, or a concrete strain of
18 0.002 is reached in compression; evaluated using expected material properties,
19 radians/in.
20 yE = Curvature in the effective bilinear moment-curvature relationship associated with
21 MyE; evaluated using expected material properties, radians/in.
Page 154 of 217

1
2 13.2Definitions
3 acceptance criterialimiting values of properties, such as drift, strength demand, and inelastic
4 deformation, used to determine the acceptability of a component at a given Performance Level.
5 actionan internal moment, shear, torque, axial force, deformation, displacement, or rotation
6 corresponding to a displacement caused by a structural degree of freedom; designated as force- or
7 deformation-controlled.
8 aspect ratioratio of full height to length for concrete and masonry shear walls; ratio of span
9 to depth for horizontal diaphragms.
10 assemblytwo or more interconnected components.
11 beama structural member whose primary function is to carry loads transverse to its
12 longitudinal axis.
13 boundary componenta structural component at the boundary of a shear wall or a diaphragm
14 or at an edge of an opening in a shear wall or a diaphragm that possesses tensile or compressive
15 strength to transfer lateral forces to the seismic-force-resisting system.
16 braced framea vertical seismic-force-resisting element consisting of vertical, horizontal, and
17 diagonal components joined by concentric or eccentric connections.
18 building performance levela limiting damage state for a building, considering structural and
19 nonstructural components, used in the definition of performance objectives.
20 capacitythe permissible strength or deformation for a component action.
21 chordsee diaphragm chord.
22 closed stirrups or tiestransverse reinforcement defined in ACI 318 consisting of standard
23 stirrups or ties with hooks having a bend angle of at least 90-degrees and lap splices in a pattern
Page 155 of 217

1 that encloses longitudinal reinforcement.
2 collectorsee diaphragm collector.
3 column (or beam) jacketinga retrofit method in which a concrete column or beam is encased
4 in a steel, concrete, or FRP (Fiber Reinforced Polymer) jacket to strengthen or repair the member
5 by confining the concrete.
6 componenta part of an architectural, mechanical, electrical, or structural system of a building.
7 concrete masonrymasonry constructed with solid or hollow units made of concrete; can be
8 ungrouted or grouted.
9 connectiona link that transmits actions from one component or element to another component
10 or element, categorized by type of action (moment, shear, or axial).
11 connectorsnails, screws, lags, bolts, split rings, shear plates, headed studs, and welds used to
12 link components to other components.
13 coupling beama component that ties or couples adjacent shear walls acting in the same plane.
14 critical actionthe component action that reaches its elastic limit at the lowest level of lateral
15 deflection or loading of the structure.
16 cross tiea component that spans the width of the diaphragm and delivers out-of-plane wall
17 forces over the full depth of the diaphragm.
18 deep foundationdriven piles made of steel, concrete, or wood, cast-in-place concrete piers,
19 or drilled shafts of concrete.
20 deformabilitythe ratio of the ultimate deformation to the limit deformation.
21 deformation-controlled actionan action that has an associated deformation that is allowed to
22 exceed the yield value of the element being evaluated. the extent of permissible deformation
23 beyond yield is based on component modification factors (m-factors).
Page 156 of 217

1 deformation-sensitive componenta component that is sensitive to deformation imposed by
2 the drift or deformation of the structure, including deflection or deformation of diaphragms.
3 demandthe amount of force or deformation imposed on an element or component.
4 design earthquakeA user-specified earthquake for the evaluation or retrofit of a building that
5 has ground-shaking criteria described in Chapter 2 of ASCE 41.
6 licensed design professional All references in this standard to the licensed design
7 professional shall be understood to mean the person who is licensed and responsible for, and in
8 charge of, the inspection, evaluation, structural design, or retrofit design..
9 design resistance (force or moment, as appropriate): resistance provided by a member or
10 connection; the product of adjusted resistance, the resistance factor, and the time-effect factor.
11 diaphragma horizontal (or nearly horizontal) structural element, such as a floor or roof
12 system, used to transfer inertial lateral forces to vertical elements of the seismic-force-resisting
13 system.
14 diaphragm chorda boundary component perpendicular to the applied force that is provided
15 to resist tension or compression caused by the diaphragm moment.
16 diaphragm collectora component parallel to the applied force that transfers lateral forces
17 from the diaphragm of the structure to vertical elements of the seismic-force-resisting system.
18 diaphragm ratiosee aspect ratio.
19 diaphragm strutsee diaphragm tie.
20 diaphragm tiea component parallel to the applied load that is provided to transfer wall
21 anchorage or diaphragm inertial forces within the diaphragm. also called diaphragm strut. see cross
22 tie, for case where diaphragm tie spans the entire diaphragm width.
23 drifthorizontal deflection at the top of the story relative to the bottom of the story.
Page 157 of 217

1 edge distancethe distance from the edge of the member to the center of the nearest fastener.
2 effective stiffnessthe value of the lateral force in the building, or an element thereof, divided
3 by the corresponding lateral displacement.
4 elementan assembly of structural components that act together in resisting forces, including
5 gravity frames, moment-resisting frames, braced frames, shear walls, and diaphragms.
6 evaluationan approved process or methodology of evaluating a building for a selected
7 performance objective.
8 expected material propertythe mean value of the material property from material tests; as
9 defined in ASCE 41 Section 7.5.1.4.
10 expected strengththe mean value of resistance of a component at the deformation level
11 anticipated for a population of similar components, including consideration of the variability in
12 material strength as well as strain-hardening and plastic section development; evaluated using
13 expected material properties as defined in ASCE 41 Section 7.5.1.4.
14 flexible diaphragma diaphragm with horizontal deformation along its length twice or more
15 than twice the average story drift.
16 force-controlled actionan action that is not allowed to exceed the nominal strength of the
17 element being evaluated.
18 foundation systeman assembly of structural components, located at the soilstructure
19 interface, that transfers loads from the superstructure into the supporting soil.
20 hoopstransverse reinforcement defined in section 25.7.4 of ACI 318 consisting of closed ties
21 with 135-degree hooks embedded into the core and no lap splices.
22 in-plane wallsee shear wall.
23 infilla panel of masonry placed within a steel or concrete frame. Panels separated from the
Page 158 of 217

1 surrounding frame by a gap are termed isolated infills. Panels that are in full contact with a frame
2 around its full perimeter are termed shear infills.
3 jointan area where ends, surfaces, or edges of two or more components are attached;
4 categorized by type of fastener or weld used and method of force transfer.
5 knee jointa joint that in the direction of framing has one column and one beam.
6 level of seismicitya degree of expected seismic hazard. For this standard, levels are
7 categorized as very low, low, moderate, or high, based on mapped acceleration values and site
8 amplification factors, as defined in Section 2.5 (Table 2-5) of ASCE 41.
9 lightweight concretestructural concrete that has an air-dry unit weight not exceeding 115
10 lb/ft3.
11 linear dynamic procedure (LDP)a response-spectrum-based modal analysis procedure
12 defined in ASCE 41, the use of which is required where the distribution of lateral forces is expected
13 to depart from that assumed for the linear static procedure.
14 linear static procedure (LSP)a lateral force analysis procedure defined in ASCE 41, using a
15 pseudolateral force. This procedure is used for buildings for which the linear dynamic procedure
16 is not required.
17 load patha path through which seismic forces are delivered from the point at which inertial
18 forces are generated in the structure to the foundation and, ultimately, the supporting soil.
19 lower-bound material propertythe mean value of the material property from material tests
20 minus one standard deviation; as defined in ASCE 41 Section 7.5.1.4.
21 lower-bound strengththe mean minus one standard deviation of the governing strength for a
22 population of similar components; evaluated using lower-bound material properties as defined in
23 ASCE 41 Section 7.5.1.4.
Page 159 of 217

1 masonrythe assemblage of masonry units, mortar, and possibly grout or reinforcement;
2 classified with respect to the type of masonry unit, including clay-unit masonry, concrete masonry,
3 or hollow-clay tile masonry.
4 moment frame (MF)a frame capable of resisting horizontal forces caused by the members
5 (beams, columns, and slabs) and joints resisting forces primarily by flexure.
6 nominal strengththe capacity of a structure or component to resist the effects of loads, as
7 determined by (1) computations using specified material strengths and dimensions, and formulas
8 derived from accepted principles of structural mechanics; or (2) field tests or laboratory tests of
9 scaled models, allowing for modeling effects and differences between laboratory and field
10 conditions.
11 nonstructural componentan architectural, mechanical, or electrical component of a building
12 that is permanently installed in, or is an integral part of, a building system.
13 overturningbehavior that results when the moment produced at the base of vertical seismic-
14 force-resisting elements is larger than the resistance provided by the building weight and the
15 foundation resistance to uplift.
16 perforated wall or perforated infill panela wall or panel not meeting the requirements for a
17 solid wall or infill panel.
18 performance objectiveone or more pairings of a selected seismic hazard level with both an
19 acceptable or desired structural performance level and an acceptable or desired
20 nonstructural performance level.
21 piervertical portion of a wall between two horizontally adjacent openings or by an opening
22 and an edge. piers resist axial stresses from gravity forces and bending moments from combined
23 gravity and lateral forces.
Page 160 of 217

1 primary componentan element that is required to resist the seismic forces and accommodate
2 seismic deformations for the structure to achieve the selected performance level.
3 required member resistance (or required strength)action on a component or connection,
4 determined by structural analysis, resulting from the factored loads and the critical load
5 combinations.
6 resistancethe capacity of a structure, component, or connection to resist the effects of loads.
7 retrofitimproving the seismic performance of structural or nonstructural components of a
8 building.
9 retrofit measuresmodifications to existing components, or installation of new components,
10 that correct deficiencies identified in a seismic evaluation as part of a scheme to rehabilitate a
11 building to achieve a selected performance objective.
12 retrofit methodone or more procedures for improving the seismic performance of existing
13 buildings.
14 retrofit strategya technical approach for developing rehabilitation measures for a building to
15 improve seismic performance.
16 rigid diaphragma diaphragm with horizontal deformation along its length less than half the
17 average story drift.
18 secondary componentan element that accommodates seismic deformations but is not
19 required to resist the seismic forces it can attract for the structure to achieve the selected
20 performance level.
21 seismic-force-resisting systemthose elements of the structure that provide its basic strength
22 and stiffness to resist seismic forces.
23 shallow foundationisolated or continuous spread footings or mats.
Page 161 of 217

1 shear walla wall that resists lateral forces applied parallel with its plane; also known as an in-
2 plane wall.
3 solid wall or solid infill panela wall or infill panel with openings not exceeding 5% of the
4 wall surface area. The maximum length or height of an opening in a solid wall must not exceed
5 10% of the wall width or story height. Openings in a solid wall or infill panel must be located
6 within the middle 50% of a wall length and story height and must not be contiguous with adjacent
7 openings.
8 stiff diaphragma diaphragm that is neither flexible nor rigid.
9 storythe portion of a structure between the tops of two successive finished floor surfaces and,
10 for the topmost story, from the top of the floor finish to the top of the roof structural element.
11 strengththe maximum axial force, shear force, or moment that can be resisted by a component.
12 strong-column, weak-beama connection where the total moment capacity of the columns in
13 any moment frame joint is greater than the total moment capacity of the beams, ensuring inelastic
14 action in the beams.
15 structural componenta component of a building that provides gravity- or lateral-load
16 resistance as part of a continuous load path to the foundation, including beams, columns, slabs,
17 braces, walls, wall piers, coupling beams, and connections; designated as primary or secondary.
18 structural performance levela limiting structural damage state; used in the definition of
19 performance objectives.
20 structural systeman assemblage of structural components that are joined together to provide
21 regular interaction or interdependence.
22 subassemblya portion of an assembly.
23 superstructurethe portion of the structure above the foundation or isolation system.
Page 162 of 217

1 tiesee diaphragm tie.
2 wall piervertical portion of a wall between two horizontally adjacent openings or an opening
3 and an edge.
6 COMMENTARY REFERENCES
8 ACI committee documents and documents published by other organizations that are cited in the
9 commentary are listed by document number, year of publication, and full title, followed by
10 authored documents listed alphabetically.
11
12
13 American Concrete Institute (ACI)
14
15 201.1R-08 Guide for Conducting a Visual Inspection of Concrete in Service
16
17 214.4R-10 Guide for Obtaining Cores and Interpreting Compressive Strength Results
18
19 228.1R-03 In-Place Methods to Estimate Concrete Strength
20
21 228.2R-13 - Report on Nondestructive Test Methods for Evaluation of Concrete in Structures
22
23 318-02 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-02) and Commentary
Page 163 of 217

1 318-14 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-14) and Commentary
3 352R-02 Recommendations for Design of Beam-Column Connections in Monolithic Reinforced
4 Concrete Structures
6 355.2-07 Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary
8 355.4-11 Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete (ACI 355.4-11) and
9 Commentary
10
11 364.1R-07 Guide for Evaluation of Concrete Structures before Rehabilitation
12
13 369R-11 Guide for Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Concrete Structures
14
15 374.1-05 Acceptance Criteria for Moment Frames Based on Structural Testing and Commentary
16
17 408.R-03 Bond and Development of Straight Reinforcing Bars in Tension
18
19 437R-03 Strength Evaluation of Existing Concrete Buildings
20
21 562R-16 Code Requirements for Assessment, Repair, and Rehabilitation of Existing Concrete
22 Structures and Commentary
23
Page 164 of 217

1
3 T1.1-01 Acceptance Criteria for Moment Frames Based on Structural Testing
6 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
8 360-10 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings
10
11 American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
12
13 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
14
15 11-99 Standard Guideline for Structural Condition Assessment of Existing Buildings
16
17 41-13 Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Existing Buildings
18
19
20 ASTM International
21
22 A370-03 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
23
Page 165 of 217

1 A416/A416M-16 Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed
2 Concrete
4 A421/A421M-16 Standard Specification for Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed
5 Concrete
7 A706/A706M-14 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for
8 Concrete Reinforcement
10 A722/A722M-15 Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bar for Prestressing Concrete
11
12 C39/C39M-16 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
13 Specimens
14
15 C42/C42M-03 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
16 of Concrete
17
18 C496-11 Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
19
20 E178-16a Standard Practice for Dealing with Outlying Observations
21
22
23 E488/E488M Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements
Page 166 of 217

1
3 Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)
5 172-92 NEHRP Handbook of Techniques for the Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings
7 273-97 NEHRP Guidelines for the Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings
9 274-97 NEHRP Commentary on the Guidelines for Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings
10
11 306-98 Evaluation of Earthquake-Damaged Concrete and Masonry Wall Buildings- Basic
12 Procedures Manual
13
14 307-98 Evaluation of Earthquake-Damaged Concrete and Masonry Wall Buildings- Technical
15 Resources
16
17 308-98 Repair of Earthquake Damaged Concrete and Masonry Wall Buildings
18
19 368-01 NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other
20 Structures (2000 edition)
21
22 450-04 NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other
23 Structures (2004 edition)
Page 167 of 217

1
2 547-07 cTechniques for the Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings
4 P-750-10 NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and
5 Other Structures (2009 edition)
8 Federation Internationale du Bton (fib)
10 MC 2010 fib Model Code for Concrete Structures 2010
11
12
13 Portland Cement Association (PCA)
14
15 MNL 120-10 PCI Design Handbook: Precast and Prestressed Concrete, Seventh Edition
16
17
18 Authored Documents
19 Al Aawar, W., 2015, Non-Linear Modeling Parameters for Reinforced Concrete Columns with
20 Inadequate Lap Splices, Masters Thesis, University of Texas at Austin, pp. 192.
21
22 Allen, F., and Darvall, P., 1977, Lateral Load Equivalent Frame, ACI Journal, American
23 Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, V. 74, No.7, pp. 294-299.
Page 168 of 217

1 Bartlett, F. M., and MacGregor, J. G., 1995. Equivalent Specified Concrete Strength from Core
2 Test Data, Concrete International, V. 17, No. 3., Mar., pp. 52-58.
4 Bartlett, F. M., and MacGregor, J. G., 1996. Statistical Analysis of the Compressive Strength of
5 Concrete in Structures, ACI Materials Journal, V. 93, No. 2, Mar.-Apr., pp. 158-168.
6 Berry, M., and Eberhard, M., 2005, Practical Performance Model for Bar Buckling, Journal of
7 Structural Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, Virginia, V. 131, No. 7, pp.
8 1060-1070.
10 Birely, A., Lowes, L.N., and Lehman, D.E., 2009, A practical model for beam-column and
11 connection behavior in reinforced concrete frames. Proceedings of the ATC-SEI Conference on
12 Improving the Seismic Performance of Existing Buildings and Other Structures. San Francisco.
13
14 Biskinis D. E., Roupakias G. K., and Fardis, M. N., 2004, Degradation of Shear Strength of
15 Reinforced Concrete Members with Inelastic Cyclic Displacements, ACI Structural Journal,
16 American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, V. 101, No. 6, pp. 773-783.
17
18 Brown, J, Kunnath, S.K., 2004, Low cycle fatigue failure of reinforcing steel bars , ACI Materials
19 Journal, V.101, No. 6, pp. 457- 466. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, Michigan.
20
21 Cardenas, A. E., Hanson, J. M., Corley, W. G., and Hognestad, E., 1973, "Design Provisions for
22 Shear Walls," Journal of the American Concrete Institute, Vol. 70, No. 3, pp. 221-230.
23
Page 169 of 217

1 Caltrans, 2006, Seismic design criteria, California Department of Transportation, Sacramento, CA.
3 Cho, J. -Y., and Pincheira, J. A., 2006, Inelastic Analysis of Reinforced Concrete Columns with
4 Short Lap Splices Subjected to Reversed Cyclic Loads, ACI Structural Journal, American
5 Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, V. 103, No. 2.
7 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), 1981, Evaluation of reinforcing steel systems in old
8 reinforced concrete structures, Chicago.
10 Dovich L.M., and Wight J.K., 2005, Effective slab width model for seismic analysis of flat slab
11 frames. ACI Structural Journal, V. 102, No. 6, pp. 868-875.
12
13 El-Metwally, S.E., and Chen, W.F., 1988, Moment-rotation modeling of reinforced concrete
14 beam-column connections. ACI Structural Journal, V. 102, No. 6, pp. 868-875
15
16 Elwood, K. J., and Eberhard, M. O., 2009, Effective Stiffness of Reinforced Concrete Columns,
17 ACI Structural Journal, American Concrete Institute, V. 106, No. 4, July, pp.476-484.
18
19 Elwood, K. J., and Moehle, J. P., 2004, Evaluation of Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns,
20 Proceedings of the Thirteenth World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Vancouver, British
21 Columbia.
22
Page 170 of 217

1 Elwood, K. J., and Moehle, J. P., 2005a, Drift Capacity of Reinforced Concrete Columns with
2 Light Transverse Reinforcement, Earthquake Spectra, Earthquake Engineering Research
3 Institute, Oakland, California, V. 21, No. 1, pp. 71-89.
5 Elwood, K. J., and Moehle, J. P., 2005b, Axial Capacity Model for Shear-Damaged Columns,
6 ACI Structural Journal, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, V. 102, No. 4, pp. 578-
7 587.
9 Elwood, K. J., and Eberhard, M. O., 2006, Effective Stiffness of Reinforced Concrete Columns,
10 PEER Research Digest, Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of
11 California, Berkeley, California.
12
13 Elwood, K.J., Matamoros, A., Wallace, J.W., Lehman, D.E., Heintz, J.A., Mitchell, A.D., Moore,
14 M.A., Valley, M.T., Lowes, L. Comartin, C., and Moehle, J.P., 2007, Update of ASCE/SEI 41
15 Concrete Provisions, Earthquake Spectra, Earthquake Engineering Research Institute, August,
16 V. 23, No. 3, pp. 493-523.
17
18 Fardis, M. N. and D. E. Biskinis, 2003, Deformation Capacity of RC Members, as Controlled by
19 Flexure or Shear, Otani Symposium, Tokyo, Japan, pp. 511-530.
20
21 Furlong, R.W., Hsu, C.T.T., and Mirza, S.A., 2004, Analysis and design of concrete columns for
22 biaxial bending-overview. ACI Structural Journal, V. 101, No. 3, pp. 413-23
23
Page 171 of 217

1 Ghannoum, W. M., and Matamoros, A. B., 2014, "Nonlinear Modeling Parameters and
2 Acceptance Criteria for Concrete Columns." ACI Special Publication , 1-24.
4 Ghannoum, W.M., Moehle, J.P., 2012, "Dynamic Collapse Analysis of a Concrete Frame
5 Sustaining Column Axial Failures," ACI Structural Journal, V. 109, No. 3, pp. 403-412.
8 Ghannoum, W. M., and Sivaramakrishnan, B., 2012a, "ACI 369 Rectangular Column Database."
9 Dataset, DOI: 10.4231/D36688J50, https://nees.org/resources/3658.
10
11 Ghannoum, W. M., and Sivaramakrishnan, B., 2012b, "ACI 369 Circular Column Database."
12 Dataset, DOI:10.4231/D39Z90B9T, https://nees.org/resources/3659.
13
14
15 Ghobarah, A, and Biddah, A., 1999, Dynamic Analysis of Reinforced Concrete Frames Including
16 Joint Shear Deformation, Engineering Structures, No. 21, pp. 971-987.
17
18 Henkhaus, K., 2010, Axial Failure of Vulnerable Reinforced Concrete Columns Damaged by
19 Shear Reversals, PhD Dissertation, Purdue University, West Lafayette, IN.
20
21 Hidalgo, P.A., Ledezma, C.A., and Jordan, R., 2002, Seismic Behavior of Squat Reinforced
22 Concrete Shear Walls, Earthquake Spectra, V. 18, No. 2, pp. 287-308.
23
Page 172 of 217

1 Hognestad, E., 1952, Fundamental Concepts in Ultimate Load Design of Reinforced Concrete
2 Members, Journal of the American Concrete Institute, V. 23, No. 10, pp. 809-830.
4 Hsu, C.T.T, 1988, Analysis and design of square and rectangular columns by equation of failure
5 surface. ACI Structural Journal, V. 85, No.2, pp. 167-179
7 Hwang, S.-J., Moehle, J.P., 2000, Models for Laterally Load Slab-Column Frames, ACI
8 Structural Journal, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, V. 97, No.2, pp. 345- 353.
10 Ichinose, T., 1995, Splitting Bond Failure of Columns under Seismic Action, ACI Structural
11 Journal, V. 92, No. 5, pp. 535-42.
12
13 Kang. Thomas H.-K.; Wallace, J. W.; Elwood, K. J., Nonlinear Modeling of Flat-Plate Systems,
14 ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering, V. 135, No. 2, Feb. 2009, pp. 147-158.
15
16 Kang, T. H-K.; Wallace, J. W., Punching of Reinforced and Post-Tensioned Concrete Slab-
17 Column Connections, ACI Structural Journal, V. 104, No 4, pp. 531 540, July August 2006.
18
19 Kang, T. H-K.; Wallace, J. W., Dynamic Responses of Flat Plate Systems with Shear
20 Reinforcement, ACI Structural Journal, V. 102 , No. 5, Sept. Oct. 2005, pp. 763 - 773.
21
Page 173 of 217

1 Lin, C.M. and Restrepo, J.I., 2002, Seismic Behaviour and Design of Reinforced Concrete
2 Interior Beam-Column Joints, Bulletin of the New Zealand Society for Earthquake Engineering,
3 Vol. 35, No. 2, pp. 108-128.
5 Luo, Y. H., Durrani, A. J., Conte, J. P., 1994, Equivalent Frame Analysis of Flat Plate Buildings
6 for Seismic Loading, Journal of Structural Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers,
7 Reston, Virginia, V. 120, No.7, pp. 2137-2155.
9 Lynn, A. C., Moehle, J. P., Mahin, S. A., and Holmes, W. T., 1996, Seismic Evaluation of
10 Existing Reinforced Concrete Columns, Earthquake Spectra, Earthquake Engineering Research
11 Institute, Oakland, California, V. 12, No. 4, pp. 715-739.
12
13 Matamoros, A. B., Matchulat, L., Woods, C., 2008, Axial Load Failure of Shear Critical Columns
14 Subjected to High Levels of Axial Load, 14th World Conference on Earthquake Engineering,
15 Beijing, China, 12-17th October.
16
17 Melek, M. and Wallace, J. W., 2004, Cyclic Behavior of Columns with Short Lap Splices ACI
18 Structural Journal, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, Vol. 101, No. 6.
19 Mitra, N., and Lowes, L.N. (2007). Evaluation, calibration and verification of a reinforced
20 concrete beam-column joint model. Journal of Structural Engineering, V. 133, No. 1, pp. 105-
21 120. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA.
22
Page 174 of 217

1 Orangun, C. O., Jirsa, J. O., and Breen, J. E., 1977. Reevalu-ation of test data on development
2 length and splices. ACI Journal, Proceedings V. 74, No. 3: 114-122. American Concrete Institute,
3 Farmington Hills, MI.
4 Panagiotakos, T. B., and Fardis, M. N., 2001, Deformation of Reinforced Concrete Members at
5 Yielding and Ultimate, ACI Structural Journal, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan,
6 V. 98, No. 2.
8 Pecknold, D. A., 1975, Slab Effective Width for Equivalent Frame Analysis, ACI Journal,
9 American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, V. 72, No.4, pp. 294-299.
10
11 Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center (PEER)/Earthquake Engineering Research
12 Institute (EERI), 2006, New information on seismic performance of concrete buildings. Seminar
13 video download available at EERI.org.
14
15 Priestley, M. J. N.; Calvi, G. M.; and Kowalsky, M. J., 2007, Displacement-Based Seismic Design
16 of Structures, IUSS Press, Pavia, Italy, 771 pp.
17
18 Priestley, M.J.N. and Kowalski, M.J., 1998, Aspects of Drift and Ductility Capacity of Cantilever
19 Structural Walls Bulletin, NZNSEE 31, 2.
20
21 Qaisrani, A.-N., 1993, Interior Post-Tensioned Flat-Plate Connections Subjected to Vertical and
22 Biaxial Lateral Loading, PhD thesis, Department of Civil Engineering, University of California-
23 Berkeley, Berkeley, Calif., 284 pp.
Page 175 of 217

1
2 Saatcioglu, M., Alsiwat, J. M., and Ozcebe, G., 1992, Hysteretic behavior of anchorage slip in
3 R/C members. Journal of Structural Engineering, V. 118, No. 9, pp. 2439-2458
5 Sezen, H., 2002, Seismic Response and Modeling of Lightly Reinforced Concrete Building
6 Columns, Ph.D. Dissertation, Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of
7 California, Berkeley, California.
9 Sezen, H. and Moehle, J. P., 2006 Seismic Tests of Concrete Columns with Light Transverse
10 Reinforcement ACI Structural Journal, American Concrete Institute, V. 103, No. 6, pp. 842-849.
11
12 Sezen, H., and Moehle, J.P., 2004, Shear Strength Model for Lightly Reinforced Concrete
13 Columns, Journal of Structural Engineering, American Society of Civil Engineers, V. 130, No.
14 11, pp. 1692-1703.
15
16 Shin, M., and LaFave, J.M. (2004). Modeling of cyclic joint shear deformation contribution in
17 RC beam-column connections to overall frame behavior. Structural Engineering and Mechanics,
18 V. 18, No. 5, pp. 645-669
19
20 Simpson, B., and Matamoros, A., 2012, Criteria for Evaluating the Effect of Displacement
21 History and Span-to-Depth Ratio on the Risk of Collapse of R/C Columns, Proceedings of the
22 15th World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Lisbon, Portugal, 24-28 September, 8 pp.
23
Page 176 of 217

1 Sokoli, D., Ghannoum, W.M., 2016, High-Strength Steel Reinforcement in Columns under
2 High Shear Stresses, ACI Structural Journal, In Press
4 Sozen, M. A., and Moehle, J. P., 1993, Stiffness of reinforced concrete walls resisting in-plane
5 shear, Electric Power Research Institute, Research Project 3094-01.
7 Sperry, J., Al-Yasso, S., Searle, N., DeRubeis, M., Darwin, D., O'Reilly, M., Matamoros, A.,
8 Feldman, L., Lepage, A., Lequesne, R., Ajaam, A., 2005, "Anchorage of High-Strength
9 Reinforcing Bars with Standard Hooks," Structural Engineering and Engineering Materials SM
10 Report No. 111, University of Kansas Center for Research, Inc., Lawrence, KS.
11
12 Vanderbilt, M. D., and Corley, W. G., 1983, Frame Analysis of Concrete Buildings, Concrete
13 International, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, V. 5, No. 12, pp.33-43.
14
15 Wallace, J.W., 1994, New Methodology for Seismic Design of RC Shear Walls, Journal of the
16
17
18
19
20 Structural Engineering Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, New York,
21 Vol. 120, No. 3, pp. 863-884.
22
Page 177 of 217

1 Wallace, J.W., 1995, Seismic design of RC shear walls; Part I: new code format, Journal of
2 Structural Engineering, ASCE, V. 121, No.1
4 Wallace, J.W., and Moehle, J.P., 1992, Ductility and detailing requirements of bearing wall
5 buildings, Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 118, No.6, pp. 16251644.
6 Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI), 2009, Historical data on wire, triangular wire fabric/mesh
7 and welded wire concrete reinforcement (WWR). TF 101-09, Wire Reinforcement Institute,
8 Hartford, CT.
9 Wood, S. L., 1990, Shear Strength of Low-Rise Reinforced Concrete Walls, ACI Structural
10 Journal, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, Vol. 87, No. 1, pp. 99-107.
11
12 Woods, C., and Matamoros, A., 2010, Effect of Longitudinal Reinforcement Ratio on the Failure
13 Mechanism of R/C Columns Most Vulnerable to Collapse, 9th Us National and 10th Canadian
14 Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Toronto, July.
15
16 Yoshimura, M., Takaine, Y., and Nakamura, T., 2004, Axial Collapse of Reinforced Concrete
17 Columns, 13th World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, Paper No. 1699.
18
19
Page 178 of 217

1
2
3
4 Fig. 1. Generalized Force-Deformation Relation for Concrete Elements or Components
Page 179 of 217

1
2
3 Fig. 2. BeamColumn Joint Modeling (Hatched Portions Indicate Rigid Element)
Page 180 of 217

1
2 Fig. 3. Joint Classification (for Response in the Plane of the Page)
Page 181 of 217

1
lp
2
3 Fig. 4. Plastic Hinge Rotation in Shear Wall Where Flexure Dominates Inelastic Response
Page 182 of 217

1
2 Fig. 5. Story Drift in Shear Wall where Shear Dominates Inelastic Response
Page 183 of 217

1
2 Fig. 6. Chord Rotation for Shear Wall Coupling Beams
Page 184 of 217

1
2 Fig. C1. Use of column shear strength equations
3
Page 185 of 217

1
2
3 Fig. C2. Modeling of slabcolumn connection
4
Page 186 of 217

1
2 Fig. C3. Identification of Component Types in Concrete Shear Wall Elements
3 Source: FEMA 306 (1998b).

4
Page 187 of 217

1
Table 1. Factors to Translate Lower-Bound

Material Properties to Expected Strength Material
Properties
Material Property Factor
Concrete compressive strength 1.50
Reinforcing steel tensile and yield strength 1.25
Connector steel yield strength 1.50
2
3
Page 188 of 217

Table 2. Default Lower-Bound Compressive Strength of Structural Concrete, lb/in.2 (MPa)
Time Frame Footings Beams Slabs Columns Walls
1000 to 2500 2000 to 3000 1500 to 3000 1500 to 3000 1000 to 2500
19001919
(7 to 17) (14 to 21) (10 to 21) (10 to 21) (7 to 17)
1500 to 3000 2000 to 3000 2000 to 3000 2000 to 4000 2000 to 3000
19201949
(10 to 21) (14 to 21) (14 to 21) (14 to 28) (14 to 21)
2500 to 3000 3000 to 4000 3000 to 4000 3000 to 6000 2500 to 4000
19501969
(17 to 21) (21 to 28) (21 to 28) (21 to 40) (17 to 28)
3000 to 4000 3000 to 5000 3000 to 5000 3000 to 10,000 3000 to 5000
1970present
(21 to 28) (21 to 35) (21 to 35) (21 to 70) (21 to 35)
1
Page 189 of 217

Table 3. Default Lower-Bound Tensile and Yield Properties of Reinforcing Steel for Various Periods
Intermediate
Structural* * Hard*
Grade 60 65 70 75
33 40 50
Minimum Yield, 50,000 60,000 65,000 70,000 75,000
33,000 (230) 40,000 (280)
lb/in.2 (MPa) (350) (420) (450) (485) (520)
Minimum
80,000 90,000 75,000 80,000 100,000
Tensile, 55,000 (380) 70,000 (485)
(550) (620) (520) (550) (690)
Year lb/in.2 (MPa)
19111959 x x x x
19591966 x x x x x x x
19661972 x x x x x
19721974 x x x x x
19741987 x x x x x
1987present x x x x x x
NOTE: An entry of x indicates that the grade was available in those years.
*
The terms structural, intermediate, and hard became obsolete in 1968.
1
Page 190 of 217

Table 4. Default Lower-Bound Tensile and Yield Properties of Reinforcing Steel for Various ASTM
Specifications and Periods
Structural Intermediate
* * Hard*
ASTM Grade
33 40 50 60 65 70 75
Minimum
33,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 65,000 70,000 75,000
Yield, lb/in.2
(230) (280) (350) (420) (450) (485) (520)
(MPa)
Minimum
55,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 75,000 80,000 100,000
Tensile, lb/in.2
(380) (485) (550) (620) (520) (550) (690)
(MPa)
ASTM
Designation Steel Type Year Range
A15
Billet 19111966 x x x
(withdrawn)
A16
Railc 19131966 x
(withdrawn)
A61
Rail 19631966 x
(withdrawn)
A160
Axle 19361964 x x x
(withdrawn)
A160
Axle 19651966 x x x x
(withdrawn)
A185 WWR 1936present x
A408
(withdrawn)
A431 Billet 19591966 x
A432
Billet 19591966 x
(withdrawn)
A497 WWR 1964present x
A615/A615M
(2003c)
A615/A615M
Billet 19741986 x x
(2003c)
A615/A615M
Billet 1987present x x x
(2003c)
A616
Railc 19681999 x x
(withdrawn)
A617
Axle 19681999 x x
(withdrawn)
A996 Rail, Axle 2000-present x x x
A706/
Low-alloy 1974present x
A706M#
A955 Stainless 1996present x x x
Page 191 of 217

Note: An entry of x indicates that the grade was available in those years.
*
The terms structural, intermediate, and hard became obsolete in 1968.

ASTM steel is marked with the letter W.

Rail bars are marked with the letter R.

Bars marked s! (ASTM A616 (withdrawn)) have supplementary requirements for bend tests.
#
ASTM A706 has a minimum tensile strength of 80 kip/in.2 (550 MPa), but not less than 1.25 times the actual yield strength.
1
Page 192 of 217

1 Table 5. Effective Stiffness Values
2 Flexural Shear
3 Component Rigidity Rigidity Axial Rigidity
4 Beams
0.3EcEIg 0.4EcEAw
5 nonprestressed*
6 Beamsprestressed* EcEIg 0.4EcEAw
7
Columns with
8 compression caused
9 0.7EcEIg 0.4EcEAw EcEAg
by design gravity
10 loads 0.5Agfc
11 Columns with
12 compression caused EcEAg
13 by design gravity 0.3EcEIg 0.4EcEAw (compression)
14 loads 0.1Agfcor EsAs (tension)
with tension
15
16 Beamcolumn joints Refer to Section 4.2.2.1 EcEAg
17 Flat slabs
Refer to
18 Section 0.4EcEAg
nonprestressed
4.4.2
19
20 Refer to
Flat slabs
Section 0.4EcEAg
21 prestressed
4.4.2
22
EcEAg
23 Walls-cracked 0.35EcEIg 0.4EcEAw (compression)
24 EsAs (tension)
25 *For T-beams, Ig can be taken as twice the value of Ig of the web
26 alone. Otherwise, Ig shall be based on the effective width
27 as defined in Section 3.1.3. For columns with axial
28 compression falling between the limits provided, flexural
29 rigidity shall be determined by linear interpolation. If
interpolation is not performed, the more conservative
30 effective stiffnesses shall be used.
31
An imposed axial load NUG is permitted to be used for stiffness
32 evaluations

33 See Section 7.2.2
34
35
36
37
Page 193 of 217

Table 6. Component Ductility Demand
Classification
Maximum Value of DCR
or Displacement Ductility Descriptor
<2 Low ductility demand
2 to 4 Moderate ductility demand
>4 High ductility demand
1
2
Page 194 of 217

Table 7. Modeling Parameters and Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Nonlinear
ProceduresReinforced Concrete Beams
Modeling Parametersa Acceptance Criteriaa
Plastic Rotations Angle
(radians)
Performance Level
Plastic Rotations Residual
Angle Strength
(radians) Ratio
Conditions a b c IO LS CP
b
Condition i. Beams Controlled by Flexure
V d
-
-------------
Transverse
bal reinforcementc bw d f 'cE
0.0 C 3 (0.25) 0.025 0.05 0.2 0.010 0.025 0.05

0.0 C 6 (0.5) 0.02 0.04 0.2 0.005 0.02 0.04
0.5 C 3 (0.25) 0.02 0.03 0.2 0.005 0.02 0.03
0.5 C 6 (0.5) 0.015 0.02 0.2 0.005 0.015 0.02
0.0 NC 3 (0.25) 0.02 0.03 0.2 0.005 0.02 0.03
0.0 NC 6 (0.5) 0.01 0.015 0.2 0.0015 0.01 0.015
0.5 NC 3 (0.25) 0.01 0.015 0.2 0.005 0.01 0.015
0.5 NC 6 (0.5) 0.005 0.01 0.2 0.0015 0.005 0.01
Condition ii. Beams Controlled by Shearb
Stirrup spacing d/2 0.0030 0.02 0.2 0.0015 0.01 0.02
Stirrup spacing > d/2 0.0030 0.01 0.2 0.0015 0.005 0.01
b
Condition iii. Beams Controlled by Inadequate Development or Splicing Along the Span
Stirrup spacing d/2 0.0030 0.02 0.0 0.0015 0.01 0.02
Stirrup spacing > d/2 0.0030 0.01 0.0 0.0015 0.005 0.01
b
Condition iv. Beams Controlled by Inadequate Embedment into BeamColumn Joint
0.015 0.03 0.2 0.01 0.02 0.03
Note: fc in lb/in. (MPa) units.
2
a
Values between those listed in the table shall be determined by linear interpolation.
b
Where more than one of Conditions i, ii, iii, and iv occur for a given component, use the minimum
appropriate numerical value from the table.
c
C and NC are abbreviations for conforming and nonconforming transverse reinforcement,
respectively. Transverse reinforcement is conforming if, within the flexural plastic hinge region,
hoops are spaced at d/3, and if, for components of moderate and high ductility demand, the
strength provided by the hoops (Vs) is at least 3/4 of the design shear. Otherwise, the transverse
reinforcement is considered nonconforming.
d
V is the shear force from NSP or NDP.
Page 195 of 217

1 Table 8Modeling parameters and numerical acceptance criteria for nonlinear procedures
2 reinforced concrete columns other than circular with spiral reinforcement or seismic hoops as
3 defined in ACI 318
Modeling Parameters Acceptance criteria
Plastic rotation angles, anl and bnl ( radians) Plastic rotation angle (radians)
Residual strength ratio, cnl Performance level
IO LS CP
Columns not controlled by inadequate development or splicing along the clear height
N V yE
a nl 0.042 0.043 UD' 0.63 t 0.023 0 .0
Ag f cE VColOE

a 0.15 anl
N UD 0 .5
For 0.5 bnl 0.01 a nl 0.5 bnlb 0.7 bnlb
'
Ag f cE N 1 f cE' 0.005
5 UD
0.8 A g f cE' t f ytE

NUD
cnl 0.24 0.4 0.0
Ag fcE'
Columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing along the clear heightc
1 t f ytE 0 .0 d
anl
8 f 0.025
l ylE
0.0
N 0.0 0.5 bnl 0.7 bnl
bnl 0.012 0.085 UD' 12t anl
e
Ag fcE
0.06
cnl 0.15 36t 0.4
4 t shall not be taken greater than 0.0175 in any case nor greater than 0.0075 when ties are not adequately anchored in the core.
5 Equations in the table are not valid for columns with t smaller than 0.0005.
6 VyE/VColOE shall not be taken less than 0.2.
7 NUD shall be the maximum compressive axial load accounting for the effects of lateral forces as described in Eq. (7-34) of ASCE 41.
8 Alternatively, it shall be permitted to evaluate NUD based on a limit-state analysis.
9 a
bnl shall be reduced linearly for NUD/(AgfcE) > 0.5 from its value at NUD/(AgfcE) = 0.5 to zero at NUD/(AgfcE) = 0.7 but shall not be smaller than anl
10
11 b
NUD/(AgfcE) shall not be taken smaller than 0.1.
12 c
Columns are considered to be controlled by inadequate development or splices where the calculated steel stress at the splice exceeds the steel
13 stress specified by Eqs. (1a) or (1b). Modeling parameter for columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing shall never exceed those
14 of columns not controlled by inadequate development or splicing.
15 d
anl for columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing shall be taken as zero if the splice region is not crossed by at least two tie groups
16 over its length.
17 e
t shall not be taken greater than 0.0075.
Page 196 of 217

1 Table 9Modeling parameters and numerical acceptance criteria for nonlinear procedures
2 reinforced concrete circular columns with spiral reinforcement or seismic hoops as defined in
3 ACI 318
Modeling Parameters Acceptance criteria
Plastic rotation angles, anl and bnl ( radians) Plastic rotation angle (radians)
Residual strength ratio, cnl Performance level
IO LS CP
N V
a nl 0.06 0.06 UD' 1.3 t 0.037 yE 0 .0
A f V
g cE ColOE
a
0.15 anl
N UD 0.65
For 0.5 bnl 0.01 a nl
'
Ag f cE N 1 f cE' 0.5 bnlb 0.7 bnlb
5 UD 0.005
0.8 Ag f cE t f ytE
'

NUD
cnl 0.24 0.4 0.0
Ag fcE'
Columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing along the clear heightc
1 t f ytE 0 .0 d
anl
8 f 0.025
l ylE
0.0
NUD 0.0 0.5 bnl 0.7 bnl

bnl 0.012 0.085
12t anl
e
Ag f cE'
0.06
cnl 0.15 36t 0.4
4 t shall not be taken greater than 0.0175 in any case nor greater than 0.0075 when ties are not adequately anchored in the core.
5 Equations in the table are not valid for columns with t smaller than 0.0005.
6 VyE/VColOE shall not be taken less than 0.2.
7 NUD shall be the maximum compressive axial load accounting for the effects of lateral forces as described in Eq. (7-34) of ASCE 41.
8 Alternatively, it shall be permitted to evaluate NUD based on a limit-state analysis.
9 a
bnl shall be reduced linearly for NUD/(AgfcE) > 0.5 from its value at NUD/(AgfcE) = 0.5 to zero at NUD/(AgfcE) = 0.7 but shall not be smaller than anl
10 b
NUD/(AgfcE) shall not be taken smaller than 0.1.
11 c
Columns are considered to be controlled by inadequate development or splices where the calculated steel stress at the splice exceeds the steel
12 stress specified by Eqs. (1a) or (1b). Modeling parameter for columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing shall never exceed those
13 of columns not controlled by inadequate development or splicing.
14 d
anl for columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing shall be taken as zero if the splice region is not crossed by at least two tie groups
15 over its length.
16 e
t shall not be taken greater than 0.0075.
Page 197 of 217

1 Table 10a - Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Linear ProceduresReinforced concrete columns
2 other than circular with spiral reinforcement or seismic hoops as defined in ACI 318
m-factorsa
Performance Level
NUD Component Type

Primary Secondary
A f' t
g cE VyE/VColOE IO LS CP LS CP

0.2 1.7 3.4 4.2 6.8 8.9
0.1 0.0175
< 0.6
0.2 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.4 1.7
0.7 0.0175
< 0.6
0.2 1.5 2.6 3.2 2.6 3.2
0.1 0.0005
< 0.6
0.2 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0.7 0.0005
< 0.6
0.6 1.5 2.7 3.3 6.8 8.9
0.1 0.0175
< 1.0
0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0.7 0.0175
< 1.0
0.6 1.3 1.9 2.3 1.9 2.3
0.1 0.0005
< 1.0
0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0.7 0.0005
< 1.0
0.1 0.0175 1.0 1.3 1.8 2.2 6.8 8.9
0.7 0.0175 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0.1 0.0005 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.7 2.1
0.7 0.0005 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

Columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing along the clear height
0.1 0.0075 1.0 1.7 2.0 5.3 6.8
0.7 0.0075 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.8 3.5
0.1 0.0005 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.6
0.7 0.0005 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

3 a
4
Columns are considered to be controlled by inadequate development or splicing where the calculated steel stress at the splice exceeds the steel
5 stress specified by Eqs. (1a) or (1b). Acceptance criteria for columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing shall never exceed those of
6 columns not controlled by inadequate development or splicing.
7
Page 198 of 217

1 Table 10b - Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Linear ProceduresReinforced concrete circular
2 columns with spiral reinforcement or seismic hoops as defined in ACI 318
m-factorsa
Performance Level
NUD Component Type

Primary Secondary
A f' t
g cE VyE/VColOE IO LS CP LS CP

0.2 1.7 4.8 6.2 8.9 11.6
0.1 0.0175
< 0.6
0.2 1.4 2.1 2.6 2.1 2.6
0.7 0.0175
< 0.6
0.2 1.6 3.2 4.0 3.2 4.0
0.1 0.0005
< 0.6
0.2 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0.7 0.0005
< 0.6
0.6 1.7 3.7 4.7 8.9 11.6
0.1 0.0175
< 1.0
0.6 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.1
0.7 0.0175
< 1.0
0.6 1.4 2.1 2.5 2.3 2.8
0.1 0.0005
< 1.0
0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0.7 0.0005
< 1.0
0.1 0.0175 1.0 1.4 2.3 2.9 8.9 11.6
0.7 0.0175 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
0.1 0.0005 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.8 2.3 2.8
0.7 0.0005 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

0.1 0.0075 1.0 1.7 2.0 5.3 6.8
0.7 0.0075 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.8 3.5
0.1 0.0005 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.6
0.7 0.0005 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

3 a
4
Columns are considered to be controlled by inadequate development or splicing where the calculated steel stress at the splice exceeds the steel
5 stress specified by Eqs. (1a) or (1b). Acceptance criteria for columns controlled by inadequate development or splicing shall never exceed those of
6 columns not controlled by inadequate development or splicing.
7
Page 199 of 217

ProceduresReinforced Concrete BeamColumn Joints
Plastic Rotations Angle (radians)
Performance Level
Residual
Plastic Rotations Strength
Angle (radians) Ratio
Condition i. Interior joints (Note: for classification of joints, refer to Fig. 3)
P
V
A g f ' cE Transverse d
b reinforcementc VJ
0.1 C 1.2 0.015 0.03 0.2 0.0 0.02 0.03
0.1 C 1.5 0.015 0.03 0.2 0.0 0.015 0.02
0.4 C 1.2 0.015 0.025 0.2 0.0 0.015 0.025
0.4 C 1.5 0.015 0.2 0.2 0.0 0.015 0.02
0.1 NC 1.2 0.005 0.2 0.2 0.0 0.015 0.02
0.1 NC 1.5 0.005 0.015 0.2 0.0 0.01 0.015
0.4 NC 1.2 0.005 0.015 0.2 0.0 0.01 0.015
0.4 NC 1.5 0.005 0.015 0.2 0.0 0.01 0.015
Condition ii. Other joints (Note: for classification for joints, refer to Fig. 3)
P
V
A g f ' cE Transverse d
b reinforcementc VJ
0.1 C 1.2 0.01 0.02 0.2 0.0 0.015 0.02
0.1 C 1.5 0.01 0.015 0.2 0.0 0.01 0.015
0.4 C 1.2 0.01 0.02 0.2 0.0 0.015 0.02
0.4 C 1.5 0.01 0.015 0.2 0.0 0.01 0.015
0.1 NC 1.2 0.005 0.01 0.2 0.0 0.0075 0.01
0.1 NC 1.5 0.005 0.01 0.2 0.0 0.0075 0.01
0.4 NC 1.2 0.0 0.0075 0.0 0.0 0.005 0.0075
0.4 NC 1.5 0.0 0.0075 0.0 0.0 0.005 0.0075
a
b
P is the design axial force on the column above the joint calculated using limit-state analysis
procedures in accordance with Section 4.2.4, and Ag is the gross cross-sectional area of the
joint.
c
C and NC are abbreviations for conforming and nonconforming transverse reinforcement. Joint
transverse reinforcement is conforming if hoops are spaced at hc/2 within the joint.
Otherwise, the transverse reinforcement is considered nonconforming.
d
V is the shear force from NSP or NDP, and VJ is the shear strength for the joint. The shear strength
shall be calculated according to Section 4.2.3.
1
Page 200 of 217

1
2
3
Page 201 of 217

1
Table 12. Values of for Joint Strength Calculation
Value of
Condition i: Interior Jointsa Condition ii: other joints
Interior Joint Exterior Joint Knee Joint with or
Transverse Interior Joint with Without Transverse Exterior Joint with Without Transverse Without Transverse
Reinforcementb Transverse Beams Beams Transverse Beams Beams Beams
C 20 15 15 12 8
NC 12 10 8 6 4
a
For classification of joints, refer to Fig. 3.
b
C and NC are abbreviations for conforming and nonconforming transverse reinforcement. Joint transverse
reinforcement is conforming if hoops are spaced at hc/2 within the joint. Otherwise, the transverse reinforcement
is considered nonconforming.
2
3
Page 202 of 217

Table 13. Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Linear ProceduresReinforced Concrete Beams
m-factorsa
Performance Level
Component Type
Primary Secondary
Conditions IO LS CP LS CP
Condition i. Beams Controlled by Flexureb
V d

--------------
Transverse
bal reinforcementc bw d f 'cE
0.0 C 3 (0.25) 3 6 7 6 10
0.0 C 6 (0.5) 2 3 4 3 5
0.5 C 3 (0.25) 2 3 4 3 5
0.5 C 6 (0.5) 2 2 3 2 4
0.0 NC 3 (0.25) 2 3 4 3 5
0.0 NC 6 (0.5) 1.25 2 3 2 4
0.5 NC 3 (0.25) 2 3 3 3 4
0.5 NC 6 (0.5) 1.25 2 2 2 3
Condition ii. Beams Controlled by Shearb
Stirrup spacing d/2 1.25 1.5 1.75 3 4
Stirrup spacing > d/2 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 3
b
Condition iii. Beams Controlled by Inadequate Development or Splicing Along the Span
Stirrup spacing d/2 1.25 1.5 1.75 3 4
Stirrup spacing > d/2 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 3
b
Condition iv. Beams Controlled by Inadequate Embedment into BeamColumn Joint
2 2 3 3 4
Note: fc in lb/in. (MPa) units.
2
a
b
Where more than one of Conditions i, ii, iii, and iv occurs for a given component, use the minimum appropriate numerical
value from the table.
c
C and NC are abbreviations for conforming and nonconforming transverse reinforcement. Transverse reinforcement is
conforming if, within the flexural plastic hinge region, hoops are spaced at d/3, and if, for components of
moderate and high ductility demand, the strength provided by the hoops (Vs) is at least 3/4 of the design shear.
Otherwise, the transverse reinforcement is considered nonconforming.
d
V is the shear force calculated using limit-state analysis procedures in accordance with Section 4.2.4.1.
1
2
Page 203 of 217

Table 14Numerical acceptance criteria for linear proceduresreinforced concrete beamcolumn joints
m-Factorsa
Performance Level
Component Type
Primary Secondary
Condition i. Interior Joints (for classification of joints, refer to Fig. 3)
P b V d
Transverse
A g f ' cE reinforcementc VJ
0.1 C 1.2 1 1 1 3 4
0.1 C 1.5 1 1 1 2 3
0.4 C 1.2 1 1 1 3 4
0.4 C 1.5 1 1 1 2 3
0.1 NC 1.2 1 1 1 2 3
0.1 NC 1.5 1 1 1 2 3
0.4 NC 1.2 1 1 1 2 3
0.4 NC 1.5 1 1 1 2 3
Condition ii. Other Joints (for classification of joints, refer to Fig. 3)
P b V d
Transverse
A g f ' cE reinforcementc VJ
0.1 C 1.2 1 1 1 3 4
0.1 C 1.5 1 1 1 2 3
0.4 C 1.2 1 1 1 3 4
0.4 C 1.5 1 1 1 2 3
0.1 NC 1.2 1 1 1 2 3
0.1 NC 1.5 1 1 1 2 3
0.4 NC 1.2 1 1 1 1.5 2
0.4 NC 1.5 1 1 1 1.5 2
a
b
P is the design axial force on the column above the joint calculated using limit-state analysis procedures in accordance with
Section 10.4.2.4. Ag is the gross cross-sectional area of the joint.
c
V is the shear force and VJ is the shear strength for the joint. The design shear force and shear strength shall be calculated
according to Section 4.2.4.1 and Section 4.2.3, respectively.
d
C and NC are abbreviations for conforming and nonconforming transverse reinforcement, respectively. Transverse
reinforcement is conforming if hoops are spaced at hc/2 within the joint. Otherwise, the transverse reinforcement
is considered nonconforming.
1
2
Page 204 of 217

ProceduresTwo-Way Slabs and SlabColumn

Plastic Rotation Angle (radians)
Performance Level
Residual
Plastic Rotation Angle Strength
(radians) Ratio Secondary
b
Condition i. Reinforced Concrete SlabColumn Connections
Continuity
Vg reinforceme
-----
Vo c
ntd
0 Yes 0.035 0.05 0.2 0.01 0.035 0.05
0.2 Yes 0.03 0.04 0.2 0.01 0.03 0.04
0.4 Yes 0.02 0.03 0.2 0 0.02 0.03
0.6 Yes 0 0.02 0 0 0 0.02
0 No 0.025 0.025 0 0.01 0.02 0.025
0.2 No 0.02 0.02 0 0.01 0.015 0.02
0.4 No 0.01 0.01 0 0 0.008 0.01
0.6 No 0 0 0 0 0 0
e e
> 0.6 No 0 0 0 e
Condition ii. Post-tensioned SlabColumn Connectionsb
Continuity
Vg reinforceme
-----
Vo c
ntd|
0 Yes 0.035 0.05 0.4 0.01 0.035 0.05
0.6 Yes 0.005 0.03 0.2 0 0.025 0.03
> 0.6 Yes 0 0.02 0.2 0 0.015 0.02
0 No 0.025 0.025 0 0.01 0.02 0.025
0.6 No 0 0 0 0 0 0
e e
> 0.6 No 0 0 0 e
Condition iii. Slabs Controlled by Inadequate Development or Splicing Along the Spanb
0 0.02 0 0 0.01 0.02
b
Condition iv. Slabs Controlled by Inadequate Embedment into SlabColumn Joint
0.015 0.03 0.2 0.01 0.02 0.03
a
b
Where more than one of Conditions i, ii, iii, and iv occur for a given component, use the minimum
appropriate numerical value from the table.
c
Vg is the gravity shear acting on the slab critical section as defined by ACI 318, and Vo is the direct
punching shear strength as defined by ACI 318.
Page 205 of 217

d
Yes shall be used where the area of effectively continuous main bottom bars passing through the
column cage in each direction is greater than or equal to 0.5Vg/(fy). Where the slab is post-
tensioned, Yes shall be used where at least one of the post-tensioning tendons in each
direction passes through the column cage. Otherwise, No shall be used.
e
Action shall be treated as force-controlled.
1
2
Page 206 of 217

Table 16. Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Linear ProceduresTwo-Way Slabs and SlabColumn
m-Factorsa
Performance Level
Component Type
Primary Secondary
Condition i. Reinforced Concrete SlabColumn Connectionsb
Vg Continuity
-----
Vo c
reinforcementd
0 Yes 2 2.75 3.5 3.5 4.5
0.2 Yes 1.5 2.5 3 3 3.75
0.4 Yes 1 2 2.25 2.25 3
0.6 Yes 1 1 1 1 2.25
0 No 2 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.75
0.2 No 1.5 2 2 2 2.25
0.4 No 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.75
0.6 No 1 1 1 1 1
e e e e
> 0.6 No e
Condition ii. Post-tensioned SlabColumn Connectionsb
Vg Continuity
-----
Vo c
reinforcementd
0 Yes 1.5 2 2.5 2.5 3.25
0.6 Yes 1 1 1 2 2.25
> 0.6 Yes 1 1 1 1.5 1.75
0 No 1.25 1.75 1.75 1.75 2
0.6 No 1 1 1 1 1
e e e e
> 0.6 No e
Condition iii. Slabs Controlled by Inadequate Development or Splicing Along the Spanb
e e e 3 4
Condition iv. Slabs Controlled by Inadequate Embedment into SlabColumn Jointb
2 2 3 3 4
1 a
2 b
Where more than one of conditions i, ii, iii, and iv occur for a given component, use the minimum appropriate numerical value from the table.
3 c
Vg is the the gravity shear acting on the slab critical section as defined by ACI 318, and Vo is the direct punching shear strength as defined by ACI
4 318.
5 d
Yes shall be used where the area of effectively continuous main bottom bars passing through the column cage in each direction is greater than
6 or equal to 0.5Vg/(fy). Where the slab is post-tensioned, Yes shall be used where at least one of the posttensioning tendons in each direction
7 passes through the column cage. Otherwise, No shall be used.
8 e
Action shall be treated as force controlled.
9
Page 207 of 217

ProceduresReinforced Concrete Infilled Frames
Modeling Parametersa Acceptance Criteria

Residual Total Strain
Strength Performance
Total Strain Ratio Level
Conditions d e c IO LS CP
b
i. Columns Modeled as Compression Chords
Columns confined along entire 0.02 0.04 0.4 0.003 0.03 0.04
lengthc
All other cases 0.003 0.01 0.2 0.002 0.01 0.01
ii. Columns Modeled as Tension Chordsb
Columns with well-confined 0.05 0.05 0.0 0.01 0.04 0.05
splices or no splices
All other cases See 0.03 0.2 See 0.02 0.03
note d note d
a
Interpolation shall not be permitted.
b
If load reversals result in both Conditions i and ii applying to a single column, both conditions
shall be checked.
c
A column shall be permitted to be considered to be confined along its entire length where the
quantity of hoops along the entire story height including the joint is equal to three-
quarters of that required by ACI 318 for boundary components of concrete shear walls.
The maximum longitudinal spacing of sets of hoops shall not exceed either h/3 or 8db.
d
Potential for splice failure shall be evaluated directly to determine the modeling and acceptance
criteria. For these cases, refer to the generalized procedure of Section 6.3.2.
1
2
Page 208 of 217

Table 18. Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Linear ProceduresReinforced Concrete Infilled
Frames
m-Factorsa
Performance Level
Component Type
Primary Secondary
i. Columns Modeled as Compression Chordsb
Columns confined along entire lengthc 1 3 4 4 5
All other cases 1 1 1 1 1
ii. Columns Modeled as Tension Chordsb
Columns with well-confined splices or no 3 4 5 5 6
splices
All other cases 1 2 2 3 4
a
Interpolation shall not be permitted.
b
If load reversals result in both Conditions i and ii applying to a single column, both conditions shall be checked.
c
A column is permitted to be considered to be confined along its entire length where the quantity of hoops along the
entire story height, including the joint, is equal to three-quarters of that required by ACI 318 for boundary
components of concrete shear walls. The maximum longitudinal spacing of sets of hoops shall not exceed
either h/3 or 8db.
Page 209 of 217

Table 19. Modeling Parameters and Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Nonlinear Procedures
R/C Shear Walls and Associated Components Controlled by Flexure
Acceptable Plastic
Hinge Rotationa
(radians)
Plastic Hinge Residual

Rotation Strength
(radians) Ratio Performance Level
a b c IO LS CP
Conditions
i. Shear Walls and Wall Segments
As A's f yE P V Confined
twlw f 'cE twlw f 'cE Boundaryb
0.1 4 Yes 0.015 0.020 0.75 0.005 0.015 0.020
0.1 6 Yes 0.010 0.015 0.40 0.004 0.010 0.015
0.25 4 Yes 0.009 0.012 0.60 0.003 0.009 0.012
0.25 6 Yes 0.005 0.010 0.30 0.0015 0.005 0.010
0.1 4 No 0.008 0.015 0.60 0.002 0.008 0.015
0.1 6 No 0.006 0.010 0.30 0.002 0.006 0.010
0.25 4 No 0.003 0.005 0.25 0.001 0.003 0.005
0.25 6 No 0.002 0.004 0.20 0.001 0.002 0.004
ii. Shear Wall Coupling Beamsc
Longitudinal reinforcement and V
transverse reinforcementd 0.050
twlw f ' cE
Conventional longitudinal 3 0.025 0.040 0.75 0.010 0.025 0.050
reinforcement with conforming 6 0.020 0.50 0.005 0.020 0.040
transverse reinforcement 0.035
Conventional longitudinal 0.025
3 0.020 0.50 0.006 0.020 0.035
reinforcement with nonconforming
transverse reinforcement 6 0.010 0.25 0.005 0.010 0.025
0.050
Diagonal reinforcement NA 0.030 0.050 0.80 0.006 0.030 0.050

a
Linear interpolation between values listed in the table shall be permitted.
b
A boundary element shall be considered confined where transverse reinforcement exceeds 75% of the
requirements given in ACI 318 and spacing of transverse reinforcement does not exceed 8db. It
shall be permitted to take modeling parameters and acceptance criteria as 80% of confined
values where boundary elements have at least 50% of the requirements given in ACI 318 and
spacing of transverse reinforcement does not exceed 8db. Otherwise, boundary elements shall be
considered not confined.
c
For coupling beams spanning <8 ft 0 in., with bottom reinforcement continuous into the supporting
walls, acceptance criteria values shall be permitted to be doubled for LS and CP performance.
d
Conventional longitudinal reinforcement consists of top and bottom steel parallel to the longitudinal
axis of the coupling beam. Conforming transverse reinforcement consists of (a) closed stirrups
Page 210 of 217

1
over the entire length of the coupling beam at a spacing d/3, and (b) strength of closed stirrups
Vs 3/4 of required shear strength of the coupling beam. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Page 211 of 217

1
Table 20. Modeling Parameters and Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Nonlinear Procedures
R/C Shear Walls and Associated Components Controlled by Shear
Acceptable Total Drift
(%) or Chord Rotation
(radians)a
Performance Level
Total Drift Ratio
(%), or Chord
Rotation Strength
(radians)a Ratio
d e g c f LS CP
Conditions IO
i. Shear Walls and Wall Segmentsb
As A ' s f yE P
0 . 05 1.0 2.0 0.4 0.20 0.6 0.40 1.5 2.0
t w l w f ' cE
As A ' s f yE P
0 . 05 0.75 1.0 0.4 0.0 0.6 0.40 0.75 1.0
t w l w f ' cE
ii. Shear Wall Coupling Beamsc

Longitudinal reinforcement and
V
transverse reinforcementd
twlw f 'cE
Conventional longitudinal 3 0.02 0.030 0.60

reinforcement with conforming 0.006 0.020 0.030
transverse reinforcement 6 0.016 0.024 0.30
0.005 0.016 0.024
Conventional longitudinal 3 0.012 0.025 0.40
reinforcement with 0.006 0.010 0.020
nonconforming transverse 6 0.008 0.014 0.20
reinforcement 0.004 0.007 0.012
a
For shear walls and wall segments, use drift; for coupling beams, use chord rotation; refer to Figs. 5 and 6.
b
For shear walls and wall segments where inelastic behavior is governed by shear, the axial load on the member must be
0.15 Ag fc'; otherwise, the member must be treated as a force-controlled component.
c
For coupling beams spanning <8 ft 0 in., with bottom reinforcement continuous into the supporting walls, acceptance
criteria values shall be permitted to be doubled for LS and CP performance.
d
Conventional longitudinal reinforcement consists of top and bottom steel parallel to the longitudinal axis of the
coupling beam. Conforming transverse reinforcement consists of (a) closed stirrups over the entire length of the
coupling beam at a spacing d/3 and (b) strength of closed stirrups Vs 3/4 of required shear strength of the
coupling beam.
2
3
Page 212 of 217

Table 21 Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Linear ProceduresR/C Shear Walls and
Associated Components Controlled by Flexure
m-Factorsa
Performance Level
Component Type
Primary Secondary
LS CP LS CP
Conditions IO
i. Shear Walls and Wall Segments
A s A ' s f yE P
b V c
Confined
t w l w f ' cE twlw f ' cE Boundaryd
0.1 4 Yes 2 4 6 6 8
0.1 6 Yes 2 3 4 4 6
0.25 4 Yes 1.5 3 4 4 6
0.25 6 Yes 1.25 2 2.5 2.5 4
0.1 4 No 2 2.5 4 4 6
0.1 6 No 1.5 2 2.5 2.5 4
0.25 4 No 1.25 1.5 2 2 3
0.25 6 No 1.25 1.5 1.75 1.75 2
ii. Shear Wall Coupling Beamse
Longitudinal reinforcement and transverse V
reinforcementf twlw f ' cE
c
Conventional longitudinal reinforcement with 3 2 4 6 6 9
conforming transverse reinforcement
6 1.5 3 4 4 7
Conventional longitudinal reinforcement with 3 1.5 3.5 5 5 8
nonconforming transverse reinforcement
6 1.2 1.8 2.5 2.5 4
Diagonal reinforcement NA 2 5 7 7 10
Page 213 of 217

a
Linear interpolation between values listed in the table shall be permitted.
b
P is the design axial force in the member. Alternatively, use of axial loads determined based on a limit state
analysis shall be permitted.
c
V is the shear force calculated using limit-state analysis procedures in accordance with Section 7.2.4.
d
A boundary element shall be considered confined where transverse reinforcement exceeds 75% of the
requirements given in ACI 318 and spacing of transverse reinforcement does not exceed 8db. It shall
be permitted to take modeling parameters and acceptance criteria as 80% of confined values where
boundary elements have at least 50% of the requirements given in ACI 318 and spacing of
transverse reinforcement does not exceed 8db. Otherwise, boundary elements shall be considered not
confined.
e
For secondary coupling beams spanning <8 ft 0 in., with bottom reinforcement continuous into the
supporting walls, secondary values shall be permitted to be doubled.
f
Conventional longitudinal reinforcement consists of top and bottom steel parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the coupling beam. Conforming transverse reinforcement consists of (a) closed stirrups over the
entire length of the coupling beam at a spacing d/3, and (b) strength of closed stirrups Vs 3/4 of
required shear strength of the coupling beam.
1
2
Page 214 of 217

Table 22 Numerical Acceptance Criteria for Linear Procedures- R/C Shear Walls and
Associated Components Controlled by Shear
m-factors
Performance Level
Component Type
Primary Secondary
i. Shear walls and wall segments1
As A ' s f yE P
t w l w f ' cE
0 . 05 2 2.5 3 4.5 6
As A ' s f yE P
t w l w f 'cE
0 . 05 1.5 2 3 3 4
ii. Shear wall coupling beams3
Longitudinal reinforcement and transverse V
t wlw f 'cE
reinforcement2
4
Conventional longitudinal reinforcement with 3 1.5 3 4 4 6

conforming transverse reinforcement 6 1.2 2 2.5 2.5 3.5
Conventional longitudinal reinforcement with 3 1.5 2.5 3 3 4
nonconforming transverse reinforcement 6 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 2.5
1. The shear shall be considered to be a force-controlled action for shear walls and wall segments where inelastic behavior is governed by shear and the
design axial load is greater than 0.15 Ag f c. It shall be permitted to calculate the axial load based on a limit state analysis.
2. Conventional longitudinal reinforcement consists of top and bottom steel parallel to the longitudinal axis of the coupling beam. Conforming
transverse reinforcement consists of: (a) closed stirrups over the entire length of the coupling beam at a spacing d/3, and (b) strength of closed
stirrups Vs 3/4 of required shear strength of the coupling beam.
3. For secondary coupling beams spanning <8'-0", with bottom reinforcement continuous into the supporting walls, secondary values shall be permitted to
be doubled.
4. V is the shear force calculated using limit-state analysis procedures in accordance with Section 7.2.4.1.
Page 215 of 217

1 Table C1: Range of values of nonlinear modeling parameters for concrete columns
Columns other than

Circular columns with
circular with spiral
spiral reinforcement or
reinforcement or seismic
seismic hoops
hoops
NUD/(AgfcE) t VyE/VoE anl (rad) bnl (rad)* anl (rad) bnl (rad)*
0 0.0005 0.2 0.038 0.090 0.053 0.120
0 0.0005 1.5 0.008 0.090 0.005 0.120
0 0.0175 0.2 0.048 0.090 0.075 0.120
0 0.0175 1.5 0.019 0.090 0.027 0.120
0.7 0.0005 0.2 0.008 0.008 0.011 0.011
0.7 0.0005 1.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.7 0.0175 0.2 0.018 0.018 0.033 0.033
0.7 0.0175 1.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2 * bnl values obtained by taking: fcE / fytE = 0.067
3 Table C2: Multipliers for concrete column modeling parameters to achieve specific probabilities
4 of exceedance
Multiplier to Achieve Probability of
Modeling
Exceedance
Parameter
40% 25% 10%
Reinforced concrete columns other than
anl 0.80 0.62 0.47
circular with spiral reinforcement or
seismic hoops as defined in ACI 318 bnl 0.80 0.70 0.5
Reinforced concrete circular columns anl 0.70 0.57 0.42
with spiral reinforcement or seismic
hoops as defined in ACI 318 bnl N.A.* N.A.* N.A.*
All Columns anl 0.62 0.5 0.33
bnl N.A.* N.A.* N.A.*
5 * Multipliers not available due to limited test data
Page 216 of 217

1
Table C3. Reinforced Concrete Shear Wall Component Types
Component Type
Description ASCE 41 Designation
per FEMA 306 (1998b)
RC1 Isolated Wall or Stronger than beam or spandrel components that can Monolithic reinforced
Stronger Wall frame into it so that nonlinear behavior (and damage) is concrete wall or vertical
Pier generally concentrated at the base, with a flexural plastic wall segment
hinge or shear failure. Includes isolated (cantilever)
walls. If the component has a major setback or cutoff of
reinforcement above the base, this section should be also
checked for nonlinear behavior
RC2 Weaker Wall Pier Weaker than the spandrels to which it connects;
characterized by flexural hinging top and bottom or
shear failure
RC3 Weaker Spandrel Weaker than the wall piers to which it connects; Horizontal wall segment or
or Coupling Beam characterized by hinging at each end, shear failure, or coupling beam
sliding shear failure
RC4 Stronger Spandrel Should not suffer damage because it is stronger than
attached wall piers. If this component is damaged, it
should probably be reclassified as RC3
RC5 Pier-Spandrel Typically not a critical area in RC walls Wall segment
Panel Zone
2
3
4
5
Page 217 of 217

Standard Requirements for Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Existing Concrete Buildings (369.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Requirements for Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Existing Concrete Buildings (369.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

369.

3 (369.1) and Commentary

4 Reported by Committee 369

Wassim Ghannoum, Chair

Anna Birely Adolfo Matamoros

Sergio Brena Steven McCabe

Casey Champion Murat Melek

Jeffrey Dragovich Jack Moehle

Kenneth Elwood Arif Ozkan

Una Gilmartin Robert Pekelnicky

Garrett Hagen Jose Pincheira

Wael Hassan Mario Rodriguez

Mohammad Iqbal Murat Saatcioglu

Jose Izquierdo-Encarnacion Siamak Sattar

Afshar Jalalian Halil Sezen

Thomas Kang Roberto Stark

Dominic Kelly Andreas Stavridis

Insung Kim John Wallace

Laura Lowes Tom Xia

3 connection; deformation-controlled; demand-capacity ratio; force-controlled; foundation;

5 analysis; load-deformation relationship; m-factor; modeling parameters; moment-frames;

8 stiffness; structural wall.

16 Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended Seismic Provisions produced by the

3 screening procedures. Chapter 4 of ASCE 41 summarizes Tier 1 screening procedures, while

4 Chapters 5 and 6 summarize Tier 2 deficiency-based procedures and Tier 3 systematic

8 acceptance criteria. Chapter 8 of ASCE 41 provides geotechnical engineering provisions for

9 building foundations and assessment of seismic-geologic site hazards. References to these

14 information on evaluation and repair of damaged concrete wall components.

18 and systems omitted in the present version of the standard.

16 methodologies adopted in the standard.

20 components of the seismic-force-resisting system of an existing building. These building standard

3 components. Chapters 4 through 9 provide modeling procedures, component strengths, acceptance

7 retrofit measures for concrete diaphragms and concrete foundation systems.

19 such information shall be supplemented by materials testing based on requirements of Chapter 2.

21 requirements of Section 2.3.

22 Material properties of existing concrete components shall be determined in accordance with

3 determine the knowledge factor as specified in Section 2.4.

8 knowledge gainedinanalyzing componentand systembehavior.Personnelinvolvedin material

9 property quantification and condition assessment should be experienced in the proper

17 2.2 Properties of In-Place Materials and Components

18 2.2.1 Material Properties

20 for the as-built structure:

21 1. Concrete compressive strength; and

2 place and post-installed anchors, and metal connection hardware.

6 requirements of Section 2.2.4.

2 structures and interpretation of core compressive strengthtest results. Generally, mechanical

7 2.2.1.2 Nominal or Specified PropertiesNominal material properties, or properties specified in

8 construction documents, shall be taken as lower-bound material properties. Corresponding

9 expected material properties shall be calculated by multiplying lower-bound values by a factor

11 permitted where justified by test data.

15 1. Cross-sectional dimensions of individual components and overall configuration of

17 2. Configuration of component connections, size, embedment depth, and type of

18 anchors, thickness of connector material, anchorage and interconnection of

19 embedments and the presence of bracing or stiffening components;

20 3. Modifications to components or overall configuration of the structure;

2 by settlement or past earthquake events; and

3 6. Presence of other conditions that influence building performance, such as

4 nonstructural components that can interact with structural components during

14 2.2.3 Test Methods to Quantify Material Properties

18 be examined for physical condition as specified in Section 2.3.2.

21 regions with the least stress.

12 resisting-system or seismic-force-resisting system is replaced during the retrofit process, material